Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management
-
Upload
prem-cesc-nath -
Category
Documents
-
view
928 -
download
105
description
Transcript of Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management
AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /
DataChief C20
Alarm and monitoring systemwith process control and
power managementInstruction manual
Document revisions
Rev Date Written by Checked by Approved by
A 02.02.2002 KGr AHo KOP
B 20.11.2002 KGr AHo KOP
C 05.02.2003 KGr BW KOP
D
The original signatures are recorded in the company’s logistic database.
High voltage safetywarning
The voltages used to power this equipment arepotentially lethal. Even 110 volts can kill.
Whenever possible, the following precautionarymeasures should be taken before any work iscarried out inside the equipment:
• Switch off all high-voltage power supplies.
• Check the operation of any door interlocksand any other safety devices.
• Completely discharge all high-voltagecapacitors.
It should be noted that interlocks and safetydevices are normally located only at regularaccess points, and high voltages may be exposedduring dismantling.
NEVER WORK ALONE ONHIGH-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT!
FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OFELECTRIC SHOCK
Normally, even a high voltage electric shock will
not kill instantly. The victim can still be revived
even when his breathing and heart-beat have
ceased.
Could YOU save someone’s life? In the event of
electric shock, the correct actions, performed
quickly may well save the victim’s life. Makesure you know what to do!
Immediate action
While shouting for help, remove the source of
power from the victim. Switch off the supply ifpossible, or using a dry, non-conductive material
(rubber gloves, broom handle etc.) to insulate
yourself, separate the victim from the source. Ifthe voltage exceeds 1000 volts, switch off thesupply and be ready to catch the victim. Takecare- do not become a victim yourself.
Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shoutfor assistance till someone arrives.
1 Lay the victim flat on his back and loosenany tight clothing (collar, tie, belt etc.).
2 Open his mouth and check for and removeany false teeth, chewing gum etc.
3 Check if the victim is breathing. If not,check if his heart is beating. The pulse isnormally easily found in the main arteries of theneck, either side of the throat, up under the chin.
If his heart is beating but he is not breathing,commence ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. If the
victim’s heart is not beating, commence
EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE (ECM).Continue to shout for assistance till someone
arrives.
EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE
1 Kneel beside the victim. Place the heel ofone hand in the centre of his chest, at a positionhalf way between the notch between thecollar-bones at the top of his chest, and the dip inthe breast-bone at the base of his rib cage. Placethe other hand on top of the first.
2 Keeping the arms straight and using yourentire weight, press down rapidly so that thebreast bone is depressed four- five cm, thenrelease the pressure. Repeat rhythmically at a rateof one cycle per second. This will be hard work,
but keep going. His life depends on YOU. Do notworry about breaking his ribs - these will heal ifhe survives.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION1 Kneel besides the victim’s head. Place onehand under his neck and lift, allowing his head tofall back. This will lift his tongue and open the airpassage in his throat.
2 Place the palm of the hand on his foreheadto maintain the ”chin-up” position.
3 Using the index finger and thumb of thesame hand, pinch the victim’s nostrils closed.Open his mouth.
4 Take a deep breath and cover his mouthwith yours. Blow steadily into his lungs to expandhis chest. Remove your mouth from his to allowthe air to escape from his chest. You should beable to see his chest deflate.
5 Repeat the ”inflation-deflation” cycle at arate of about 12 cycles per minute till the victimbegins to breath normally again.
COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIALRESPIRATIONIf you are alone, perform ONE cycle of artificial
respiration for every FIVE cycles of EMC. This
will be hard work, but keep going. His lifedepends on YOU!
If there are other people available to help, one
should perform the EMC while one performs theartificial respiration for every five cycles of EMC.
It will be much more efficient with two people.
Once the victim’s heart is beating and he is
breathing, roll him onto his side and support him
in that position. As consciousness returns he mayvomit, and this will allow any liquid to drain out
of his mouth.
Remove the victim to a hospital as soon as
possible, but do not interrupt the artificial
respiration and EMC cycles till his heart beat andbreathing returns.
If started quickly and performed correctly, the
resuscitation methods described will keep a
sufficient volume of oxygenated blood flowingtrough the victims body to allow full recovery.
Proficiency in the resuscitation methods can onlybe achieved trough training. All personnel
concerned should attend courses on a regular
basis. Remember, someone’s life could depend onyou.
DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?
Warnings and Cautions
WARNING Lethal voltages
This system is not fitted with safety interlocks and lethal voltagesmay be exposed when access covers are removed. Only personsqualified and authorised must remove covers and these personsshould always take extreme care once the covers are removed.
WARNING Fire
If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipatedfrom burning insulation, printed circuit boards, ETC.
WARNING Health hazard
When cleaning the inside of this system, do not inhale the dust. Thedust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individualallergies.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS disclaims anyresponsibility for damage or injury caused by improperinstallation, use or maintenance of the equipment.
Caution Electrostatic sensitive device
Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liableto damage due to static voltage. Observe all precautions forhandling of semiconductive sensitive devices.
Note This document
The information contained in this document is subject to changewithout notice. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS shall not beliable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequentialdamages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use ofthis document. 2002 Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. Allrights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyrighthereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without priorpermission from Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS.
Manufacturer Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems ASBekkajordet 8 AP.O. Box 1009N--3194 Horten, NORWAYTelephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00Fax: +47 85 02 80 82www.kongsberg.com
Purpose
The reader
This instruction manual describes how to use the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management controls and display facilities. It isintended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management and have basic knowledgeof personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systemstraining course.
Note
Due to the flexible nature of DataChief C20 not all systems described in this manual arerelevant for all deliveries. DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with processcontrol and power management is a registered trademark of Kongsberg Maritime ShipSystems. Windows NT and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Figure 1 DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station
Instruction manual
IXAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Chapters
1 Functional descriptionThis chapter presents a functional description of the DataChiefC20 Alarmand monitoring system with process control and power management..Refer to page 1.
2 Getting startedThis chapter teaches you how to use the basic control functions of theDataChiefC20. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system.Refer to page 58.
3 Alarm and monitoring systemThis chapter contains step by step procedures for operation of the alarm andmonitoring system.Refer to page 82.
4 Process control systemThis chapter contains a full descriptions of the process control system for allall operator station types.Refer to page 150.
5 Power management systemThis chapter contains a full descriptions of the power management system forall operator station types.Refer to page 186.
6 Reference guideThis chapter contain software--related information that can be reached fromone or several different types of operator locations (ROS, LOS etc.) .Refer to page 214.
7 MaintenanceThis chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and whatto do if the system fails.Refer to page 231.
8 Replaceable partsThis chapter contains a list of replaceable parts including part numbers.Drawings of the main units are found here.Refer to page 271.
9 AppendixThis chapter contains abbreviations and references.Refer to page 288.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
X AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Document historyThe information on this page is for internal use.
Rev.A First edition.
Rev.B Included 6 months and yearly maintenance, ShipViewer user informa-tion, how to use the service console, procedures for unit replacement,how alarms are printed after a blackout, how to configure a new DPUchannel and information about the new VCC, C3 and C4 Distributed Pro-cessing Units. Added section about password access. The manual is up-dated to comply with software version DC 60052.07.04.
Rev.C Updated section about power management (AD-0377 and AD-0379).Updated section about process control system (AD-0377 and AD-0378).Added information about the Midi operator station. Included variousminor changes and corrections. Reorganized normal operating informa-tion under thee main headings; Alarm and Monitoring, Process Controland Power Management System. Updated the parts lists.
Instruction manual
XIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Table of contents
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Introduction 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3 Design principles 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1 General 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2 Building blocks 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.4 Centralised operation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4 System components 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1 Remote Operator Station 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2 Midi operator station 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.3 Local operator station 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.6 ShipViewer 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.8 Gateways 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5 Software components 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.2 System functions 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.3 Process control functions 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.4 Power management system 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 Technical specifications 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1 Introduction 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP) 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS) 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS) 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--16) 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--10tc) 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi--32 & RDi--32a) 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo--8) 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo--16) 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C1) 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
XII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.6.13 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C2) 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.14 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C3) 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.15 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C4) 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 GETTING STARTED 58.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1 Introduction 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.1 Understanding the Operator Control Panel 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.2 Systems without Operator Control Panel 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Understanding the display 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Using the Midi Operator Station 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1 Overview 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2 Understanding the keyboard 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Understanding the display 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.4 Menu overview 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4 Using the Local Operator Station 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator Station 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.2 Menu structure 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 How to access menus 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.4 How to move between menu levels 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.5 How to move inside a menu 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5 The watch calling system 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Overview 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work 76. . . . . . . . . . .2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.1 Explanation of controls and indicators 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.4 How to test the panel 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.2 How to respond to alarms 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.5 How to test the panel 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction manual
XIIIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM 82.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1 Introduction 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2 Remote Operator Station 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.1 How to handle alarm events 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.2 How alarms are printed after a black--out 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 How to display alarm summary 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.4 How to display alarm history 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.5 How to display alarm group information 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 How to display counters and reset counters 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.7 How to display offscan alarms 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8 How to toggle between group and alarm display 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarms 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.11 How to print a Complete log 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.15 How to print a Counters log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.18 How to print Group log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.20 How to stop a printout 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.21 How to display system information 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.22 About password access 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information 94. . . . . . . . . . .3.2.24 Info field enable 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves 97. . . . . . . . . .3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.32 How to change alarm delay 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
XIV AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.37 How to define the engineer qualifications 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.38 How to define watch calling Off--Duty mode 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers 105. . . .
3.2.40 How to change time zone 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.41 How to change system time 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.42 How to make your own list of selected tags 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.43 How to change a list of selected tags 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.44 How to set the interval for selected points log 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.45 How to make your own trend display 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph display 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel 117. . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for a digital channel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.49 How to change the Autolog 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.50 How to change Deviation parameters 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Midi Operator Station 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.1 How to handle alarm events 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 How to display alarm history 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.3 How to display alarm summary 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.4 How to display alarm group information 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 How to change access level 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.7 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details 129. . . . . . .2.2.8 How to change tag parameters 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.9 How to change alarm limits 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.10 How to change alarm delay 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4 Local Operator Station 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 How to view alarms 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 How to turn the sound off 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarm history 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarm details 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 How to display alarm summary 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 Watch calling system 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.1 How to receive a call 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.2 How to respond to alarms 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction manual
XVAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 How to transfer watch responsibility 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 Watch Bridge Unit 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.1 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode 140. . . . . . . . .
3.7 Watch Cabin Unit 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7.1 How to display alarm information when duty mode 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Using ShipViewer 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functions 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.3 Explanation to the displays 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.4 How to print displayed information 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer images 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 Introduction 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 About the process control system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3 Remote Operator Station 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 How to operate a compressor 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.4 How to open or close valves 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4 Local Operator Station 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station 180. . . . .
4.4.2 How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station 183. . . . . . . . . . .
4 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 Introduction 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 About the power management system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3 Remote Operator Station 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 Overview 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control 188. . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.3 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control 193. . . . . . . . . .4.3.4 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
1944.3.5 How to operate the main switchboard controller 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
XVI AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.3.7 How to operate the one touch auto sequence 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Midi Operator Station 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.1 Overview 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control 202. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control 209. . . . . . . . . .3.2.5 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint
2113.2.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 REFERENCE GUIDE 214.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Introduction 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2 Tag type overview 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.1 Basic tag types 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Analogue out tags 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.3 Relays 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1 Analogue input tag items 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.2 Alarm and event limits 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Filter time 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.4 Dynamic deadband 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.5 Scaling parameters 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.6 Counter input tag items 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7 Digital input tag items 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag items 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag items 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.10 Common submenu items 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.11 Alarm submenu items 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Engineers safety 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.1 Functions 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2 Local control 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 Remote Operator Station control 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.4 Parameters 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 MAINTENANCE 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1 Introduction 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2 Overview 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Unit replacement 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.1 Recommended tools 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction manual
XVIIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6.4 Preventive maintenance 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 General 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.2 Weekly maintenance 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.3 6--monthly maintenance 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.4 Yearly maintenance 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.1 How to use the Service console program 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2 How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file 243. . . . . . .6.5.3 How to shut down a Remote Operator Station 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.4 How to replace colour graphics displays 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.5 How to replace printers 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.6 How to replace Operator Control Panels 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.7 How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.8 How to install the Remote Operator Station software 247. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 How to install the Midi Operator Station 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.1 Placement 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.2 Cutout 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.3 Electrical connections 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 Troubleshooting checklist 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 How to replace Midi Operator Stations 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagram 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 How to replace Local Operator Stations 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.3 How to recommision a Local Operator Station 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagrams 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2 How to replace Watch Calling units 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.1 How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes 262. . . . . . . . . . .6.10.2 How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors 263. .
6.10.3 How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.4 How to configure a new DPU channel 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.5 How to replace Distributed Processing Units 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 REPLACEABLE PARTS 271.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1 Introduction 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2 How to get in touch with us 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
XVIII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.3 Consumable spare Parts 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Modules 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Plugs and accessories 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Other spare parts 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Configuration settings 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8 Drawings 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 APPENDIX 288.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Introduction 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Abbreviations 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 General 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Alarm list abbreviations 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3 References 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional description
1AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 IntroductionThis chapter introduces the DataChief C20 Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management.
The following subjects are covered:
- Overview
- Design principles
- System components
- Software components
- Technical specifications
1.1.1 Software versionThis manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC60052.07.04.
Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted withDataChief C20.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
2 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.2 OverviewThe DataChief C20 is an Alarm and monitoring system withprocess control and power management. Modular design allowsflexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements,covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems tohighly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advancedprocess control. Sub-systems can include all or any combinationof the following:
• Alarm and monitoring system.
• Auxiliary control system.
• Power management system.
• Propulsion control.
• Ballast automation system.
• HVAC (air conditioning).
• Management support.
• Reefer monitoring
• Fire system
Note This document describes the DataChief C20 Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management.
The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unifiedautomation concept, where each individual ship configuration isbuilt up using standard modules communicating on CAN- andlocal area networks. DataChief C20 is configurable for all shiptypes, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passengervessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other specialpurpose vessels.
The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all thebasic alarms and status information they require in order tomaintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and otherrelevant equipment.
DataChief C20 complies with the requirements of IMO, localmaritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. Itis designed to meet the classification societies requirements forperiodically unmanned engine room operation. The systemconforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are typeapproved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardwareand software technology. DataChief C20 is developed to strictmilitary QA standards.
Functional description
3AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.3 Design principles
1.3.1 General
Alarm groups
All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups.Any alarm can only be part of one group. Each alarm group has adedicated button on the operator control panel. If only standardpersonal computer keyboard is provided the operator control panelis displayed on the colour graphics display and works in the sameway as the physical panel. Active alarms are indicated by a flashinglight (unacknowledged alarm) or steady light (acknowledgedalarm).
Alarm types
Alarm detection for analogue signals
The following functions are included:
• Instrument failure alarms.
• Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
• Low process alarms.
• High process alarms.
• High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down).
• Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarmfluctuations.
• Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incomingsignals.
• Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals
The following functions are included:
• High process alarms (open or closed).
• Return to normal detection.
• Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check
The following functions are included:
• High process alarms (open or closed).
• Line broken alarm.
• Line short alarm.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
4 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Return to normal detection.
• Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.
Inhibit alarm
Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specifiedcondition is present. This function is accomplished by defining asignal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified groupof alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend theinhibit situation for each signal.
Alarm indication
The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in thelower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag,description and state will be displayed. The following states areused by the system.
• On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN
• On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED
• On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN
• On/off signal short alarm: SHORT
• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside lowrange: IFL (Instrument Failure Low)
• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outsidehigh range: IFH (Instrument Failure High)
• Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH
• Analogue signal low alarm: LOW
• Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI
• Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO
• On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC
• On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN
To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colourshave been used. The meaning of the different colours are listedbelow:
• Normal state: GREEN
• Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*)
• State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED
• Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW
• Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE
• Not updated or invalid values: GREY
Functional description
5AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm and monitoring displays
There are several display pages for presenting alarms andmonitored values. The alarm pages comprise:
• Alarm group display page (activated from group alarmpush-buttons).
• Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms.
• Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list oftime-stamped alarms.
The monitoring pages include:
• Group display containing a list of all measuring points withinan alarm group.
• Selected points display (and logging facility).
• Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuringpoint in the system.
1.3.2 Building blocksThe DataChief C20 is a modular system that allows us to meetindividual ship owners requirements using standard modules. Themain building blocks of the DataChief C20 are:
• Distributed Processing Units: Their main functions are tomonitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue anddigital output to different devices. A number of differentDistributed Processing Units are available to meet specificcontrol and monitoring applications.
• Remote Operator Stations: Their main functions are toreceive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of thesystem. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of theWatch Calling System and printing of various logs. They alsoenable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units forinspection of variables, local operation of equipmentadjustment of parameters etc.
• Local Operator Stations: Their main functions are to enablethe operator local access to Distributed Processing Units forinspection of variables, local operation of equipmentadjustment of parameters etc.
• Watch Bridge Units: Their main functions are to indicateengine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control andto accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to andfrom the bridge.
• Watch Cabin Units: Their main functions are to indicateengine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in thepublic quarters while in bridge control.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
6 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used forcommunication between the Remote Operator Stations andother PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to twocompletely separate Local Area Networks (LAN) formaximum redundancy.
• Dual redundant CAN-bus: Used for communication betweenthe Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to twocompletely separate CAN-buses (CAN - Control AreaNetwork) for maximum redundancy.
• Dual Process Segment Controller: The dPSC is a dual twochannel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels areworking in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The mainfunctions are to process messages from the a local CAN-bussegment and send them on the global process bus, where theyare available for other dPSC’s and System Gateways.
• Process Segment Starcoupler: Used to segment the CAN-busso that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will notaffect the functions in the other segments.
• System Gateway: Connects two CAN lines to two Local AreaNetwork lines. The main purpose is to receive messages fromthe two process buses running CAN, and update the RemoteOperator Station database.
Different selections of these units are used to configure eachindividual system. DataChief C20 is a fullymicroprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety andease of installation but operation is centralised using RemoteOperator Stations (ROS). Each or a group of DistributedProcessing Units can be connected to a Local Operator Station(LOS) containing display and keyboard for back-up/localoperation.
1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture
The heart of the system is a small family of different intelligent I/Ounits called Distributed Processing Units. These communicatewith each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. Allmonitoring and automation functions are carried out by theDistributed Processing Units, while the centralised RemoteOperator Stations provide the Human Machine Interface.
Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity innumber and type of analogue or digital input and output channels.The number of channels varies from 8 to 32.
Functional description
7AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unitthe appropriate software and parameters are downloaded into theunit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to performalarm functions, some control functions, some safety, or anycombination of these. This makes it easy to separate automationsystem functions.
The process-bus used for communication between the DistributedProcessing Units in the DataChief C20 is the Controller AreaNetwork (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. Forsystems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or forother design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added tothe CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregationof the automation system between for instance the differentsections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gatewaysdo not lower system performance or limit the possibilities forlocating operator stations.
The DataChief C20 is designed to accept both a “grounded” ora “floating” earth installation. The latter installation method isrequired by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types.Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems, and groundleakage detection.
DUAL LAN
LOSLOSLOS
WCU
WCU
WCU
WCU
WCU
WBU
START
PRINTERPRINTER
21”
Fleetmaster
UPS 220 VAC
MGE
VAC
ROS ROS ROS
UPS220 VAC
MGE
VAC
UPS220 VAC
MGE
VAC
UPS24 VDC
24 V
HUB
HUB
RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET
BUZZER
ROS
300 KW
PRINTER
DUAL CAN
dPSCGateway
ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
PROCESS AREA
DUAL CAN
ROS
BUZZER
DPU
1--nn
INSTR.DRIV.
DPU
1--nn
INSTR.DRIV.
DPU
ROT. LIGHT/KLAXON
ROS
7 x 16 DPU CABINET W/dPSC
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
dPSC
2 x 16 DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
18 x 8 DPU CABINET W/dPSC
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
dPSC
1 x 8 DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
LOSLOSLOS
8 x 16 DPU CABINET W/dPSC
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
dPSC
1 x 16 DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
1 x 8 DPU CABINET W/dPSC
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
dPSC
1 x 8 DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPU
Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
8 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The Distributed Processing Units have been designed forimmunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unithas an internal three way galvanic isolation between power,communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails this willnot affect the power source, communication bus or damage thesensors. The Built In System Test will detect the error and warn theoperator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensorswill also be detected by the Built In System Test.
Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be donewithout turning the power off the DataChief C20. The procedureis simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit and then mountand connect a replacement. The operator then requests the systemto replace the module, software is automatically downloaded andthe Distributed Processing Unit starts operating.
All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualifiedaccording to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure,satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demandinglocations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounteddirectly on diesel engines or similar locations without shockabsorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. TheDistributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for someEuropean Union flagstate vessels. They also meet therequirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the EuropeanUnion Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the newElectromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
1.3.4 Centralised operation
DataChiefC20 is operated through a number of Remote OperatorStations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room.Additional stations may be located in the wheelhouse, cargocontrol room, damage control room, ship’s office or other parts ofthe vessel. The Remote Operator Stations are normally connectedto the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual RedundantControl Area Network.
The Remote Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphicdisplays and are operated either using a standard PC keyboard andmouse or through a purpose built Operator Control Panel.
The Remote Operator Stations provides the operator with anumber of standard display pictures containing information aboutthe engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of theDistributed Processing Units can be performed from the RemoteOperator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities areprovided in both machinery space and Engine Control Room.
Functional description
9AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machineryspace, and the watch-calling system allows automatic calling ofduty engineers. This allows both machinery space and enginecontrol room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinerywatch is carried out from the bridge.
All Remote Operator Stations are Windows based personalcomputers; type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel;none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via dualredundant local area network. Although every Remote OperatorStation is identical, access to vital functions may be configureddifferently. The control availability is defined by extensive use ofsoftware password access. Some Remote Operator Stations suchas units located in the ship office are normally used for monitoringonly. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms orexecution of control commands. All general information such asmonitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available forinspection.
Changing a limit or parameter on one Remote Operator Stationwill automatically update all other stations. All operator actionssuch as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of analarm limit are logged and time tagged (optional).
When ever a variable or state changes significantly the DistributedProcessing Units updates the database in each of the RemoteOperator Stations. This means that data displayed at any RemoteOperator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to requestdata each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a resultof this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local AreaNetwork is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access.
The Remote Operator Station serves as the database host forprocess data, engineering data and software. Software for RemoteOperator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Unitsare stored here. They include functions for automatic downloading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units atcommissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit isreplaced.
Configuration control of DataChief C20 systems is taken care ofby an automatic version update at any change of the engineeringdatabase or the application software. The system logs all changesmade. Version numbers and additional information can at any timebe individually inspected for each DataChief C20, as required bythe major classification societies. Our commissioning editor“Tools” is used to configure or modify the functionality of theDataChief C20 and is used to generate ”as built documentation”.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
10 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 caninterface with personal computers for remote monitoring and evenwith other external computer systems. The following drawingsgives a configuration example:
WCU
WBU
UPS220 VAC
MGE
VAC
RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET
BUZZER
DUAL CAN
ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
PROCESS AREA
BUZZER
DPU
ROT. LIGHT/KLAXON
UPS24 VDC
24 V
PRINTER
UPS24 VDC
24 V
LOS
DPU
1--nn
INSTR.DRIV.
DPU
1--nn
INSTR.DRIV.
START
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
WCU 16 group
ROS
300 KW
CHIEF ENGINEER ROOM
21”
Fleetmaster
N x 4 DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
DPUN x 3DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
N x 3DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
N x 3DPU CABINET
DPU
DPU
DPU
Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.
Functional description
11AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4 System componentsThe following pages contains a description of each of the mainsystem components of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management.
The following system components are described:
- Remote operator station
- Local Operator Stations
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- Distributed Processing Units
- Gateways
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
12 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.1 Remote Operator Station
Figure 5 Remote Operator Station (ROS)
The Remote Operator Station is a type approved personalcomputer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer.Operator input is either done through a standard personal computerkeyboard or through our custom made Operator Control Panel.
The Operator Control Panel is a specially designed keyboard thatprovides easy access to the different operator functions. It isdivided into separate function areas. Buttons are combined withlamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System andto indicate main system functions. The Operator Control Panel isin many cases connected to an external ”sound off” button.
The Remote Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (foron demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hardcopy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarmcondition, the alarm is identified by a flashing indicator on theOperator Control Panel. The alarm is also displayed on the colourgraphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printerautomatically prints the alarm. By pressing the button associatedwith the flashing indicator more detailed alarm information isdisplayed on the colour graphics display.
Functional description
13AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, suchas alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colourgraphics display, or printed on demand. Analogue sensor data canbe presented as a bargraph or a trend curve. Selected sensor datamay be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system candisplay the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or allactive alarms.
The logging printer and the colour graphics display records allstatus changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarmcondition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, thesystem returns to normal.
Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the Operator ControlPanel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines,pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow.Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or maybe printed.
The Remote Operator Station is used when transferring machinerywatch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.Selecting the engineer for watch-call duty is carried out from here,and all available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be calledto the engine control room in the case of an emergency.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
14 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.2 Midi operator station
Figure 6 Midi Operator Station (MOS).
The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose operator stationdesigned to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. Itallows alarm indication, process control and power management.Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a highresolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it canbe the only operator station. The Midi Operator Station containsa symbol library for presentation of process control equipment anduse these to display mimic diagrams. The Midi Operator Stationgives the operator the possibility to:
• Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal toa controllable object.
• Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visualand audible signals.
• Interface to a printer for alarm loging purposes.
• Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphicalfeedback.
• Reconfigure the distributed database located in the DistributedProcessing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.
Functional description
15AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.3 Local operator station
Figure 7 Local Operator Station (LOS).
The Local Operator Station is an optional operator control panel.It includes a four line by 40 characters Liquid Crystal Display(LCD display) and push-buttons for operator interaction. It is usedto allow local access to the Distributed Processing Units forinspection of process variables, local operation of equipment,simulation of input/output signals, adjustment of parameters andinspection of the built-in diagnostics.
All Distributed Processing Units connected to the same CAN-busas theLocalOperatorStation areaccessible.Assoon asconnectionis established, the Local Operator Station is able to control theselected Distributed Processing Unit.Thedialoguesaredefinedbythe functionality of each individual type of Distributed ProcessingUnit.
If a Distributed Processing Unit is isolated from the rest of thesystem because of a communication break-down, or because theRemote Operator Station has developed a serious fault, all thenecessary alarm and monitoring functions can as an option beavailable locally. Detailed information on the type of alarm and itssource is then available at the Local Operator Station.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
16 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit
Figure 8 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type.
Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and aLCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer ofmachine watch responsibility between bridge and engine controlroom. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD typehas a display to show alarms in clear text.
Figure 9 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type.
Functional description
17AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one ormore engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will callthem to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. Thealarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is that a buzzer soundsand a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. When an alarm isacknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation iscleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch BridgeUnit.
The DataChief C20 prevents the bridge from assuming watchresponsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. Thebridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quartersat any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such callsare provided.
Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having themachinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has beenacknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer is notsounded.
1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit
Figure 10 Watch Cabin Unit (WBU), LCD type.
Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and aLCD version. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. Theyare placed in the engineers cabins and in public areas. The LEDtype has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display toshow alarms in clear text.
To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge modeone or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm conditionarise a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineers cabinsand in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the WatchCabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
18 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 11 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type.
When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one ormore engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur thealarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and inthe public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch CabinUnits are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp isflashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine controlroom to find the cause of the alarm. When the alarm isacknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation iscleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units.If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period oftime, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters, and onthe bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be usedto call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room withoutan alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzeris configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-dutymode.
Functional description
19AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.6 ShipViewerShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personalcomputer connected to the DataChief C20 local area network.The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similarviewing capabilities as those found in the Remote OperatorStation, but no control functions. The following systems can bemonitored through ShipViewer dependent on the systemconfiguration:
• Engine monitoring and control system
• Power management system
• Fire system
• Tank system
The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data andallows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoidmisunderstanding and lack of information.
Functions
• Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams.
• Presentation of alarms.
• Presentation of alarm history.
• Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
20 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units
General
A number of different Distributed Processing Units are availablefor different tasks. The main functions of the DistributedProcessing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and toprovide analogue and digital output to different devices. All unitshave the same mechanical construction and are built using thesame electronic design principles. The main characteristics of theDistributed Processing Units are:
Figure 12 Distributed Processing Units (DPU)
• LED indicators on the housing for Watch-dog, Run, Generalinformation, unit initialised and power polarity.
• Three-way isolation between:
- I/O and power.
- I/O and process-bus.
- Power and process-bus.
• Single printed circuit board design.
• Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dipswitches, jumpers or sockets.
• No additional EMC protection required (only IP).
• Time synchronisation.
• Non-volatile memory.
• Remote alarms function.
• Dual CAN-bus interfaces.
• Software can be downloaded into the unit.
Functional description
21AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power andsensor excitation overload.
• All parameters are stored in each unit.
• Each unit is remotely configurable.
• No serviceable parts inside.
• All connections are plugable.
Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor.These are programmed for a number of different tasks such asdetecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits.Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down ofthe machinery. Status information is continuously monitored bythe DataChief C20’s Remote Operator Stations through thesystem network.
When an unacceptable condition is detected, the DistributedProcess Unit and DataChief C20 generates an alarm signal,identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information aboutthe condition. The following gives a short description of eachDistributed Processing Unit type:
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)
This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel isselectable as voltage, current and resistance input in differentranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a5-500Hz counter channel. The main features are:
• 16 analog or digital input channels.
• Scaled in technical units.
• 1 Counter 5 - 500 Hz.
• Limit check.
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds).
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
• CAN net status, error handling.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
22 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)
This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperaturemeasurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of differenttype. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhausttemperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can beconnected, with ranges ± 50, ± 200, 0 to + 600_C. A Cold JunctionCompensation function is included. If external compensation isneeded, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16is recommended. The main features are:
• 10 thermo-coupler input channels.
• Scaled in technical units.
• Limit check.
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events.
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
• CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 and RDi-32a)
These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts andincludes LED status indicators. The main features are:
• 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators.
• Input dry contacts.
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events.
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
• CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)
This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel isselectable for voltage or current output in different ranges andalmost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to driveanalogue indicators. By placing the module close to instrumentslong cables can be avoided. The main features are:
• 8 analog output channels.
Functional description
23AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• ± 10VDC / ±20 mA.
• CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)
This unit has 16 digital output channels and includes LED statusindicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3Amperes (resistive load). Maximum voltage is 230 VAC. The mainfeatures are:· 16 digital output channels with LED status indicator.The main features are:
• Change over, brake before make relay-contacts.
• Pulse on output.
• Pulse off output.
• CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)
The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output DistributedProcessing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generatorcontrol, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems.
The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can beindividually configured to handle both analogue and digitalsignals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect theelectronics against damage.
The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a currentsignal. Based on these signals the following values can bemeasured and calculated:
• AC voltage available from generator and busbar.
• AC current supplied from the generator.
• AC frequency of generator and busbar.
• Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuitbreakers.
• Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculatingreactive load, kVAr.
• Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phaseangle.
The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotatingspeed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. The twoanalogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltageor current.
The unit can further control six digital output channels (2-polerelay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver withbuilt-in loop fail detection facilities.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
24 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Number ofchannels
Function Level
6 Digital output Solenoid valve driver or relay,max 3 A resistive load
2 Analogue output mA
2 Analogue input.ACV (1--phase)
Max. 30Vrms, 50/60 Hz
1 Analogue input.AC current
Max. 1A, 50/60 Hz
4 Analogue/digitalinput, flexible
As RAi--16
2 Input from pick-up
24VDC (counter input)
4 Digital input As RDI-32
Table 1 RIO-C1 Process connections.
The main features are:
• 21 analog or digital, input and output channels with LED statusindicator.
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events.
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
• CAN net status, error handling.
Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)
The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs andoutputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channelswhich are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. Thedigital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch)or an external 24VDC or 24VAC signal. Each channel has anelectronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When thefaulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic fuseis automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital outputchannels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It isparticularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The mainfeatures are:
• 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator.
- 8 channels relays change over, brake before make.
- 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24VDC liveinput or dry contacts.
Functional description
25AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.
• Trend.
• Time stamp of alarms and events.
• Self checking.
• Sensor excitation power overload.
CAN net status, error handling.
Process Segment Starcoupler
The CAN line is vulnerable against short circuit and unterminatedlines. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CANsegment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sectionsof a CAN segment from each other.
Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on theISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process SegmentStarcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits thatare not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunctionon one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals.
The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125kBaud is 530m.A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to515m. This length is the maximum line length between any twonodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use theProcess Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a processsegment, where the segment is running through roughenvironment or fire zones.
Voltage converter controller (VCC)
The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards.The module secures the installation of the power management andgenerator protection system, by transforming the higher voltagesto low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with sixvoltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. Themodule handles three major tasks:
• Supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltagefrom the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2,L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
• Supply the C3 generator protection module with 24VDC power(1A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source.
• Supply the C4 power management module with a single phaseAC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and theswitchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.
As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformersfor 690 VAC.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
26 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Generator monitoring and control (C4)
The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators andbustie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing tovoltage and current transformers, as well as switchboardequipment.
• Synchronize and connect of generator CB.
• Synchronize and connect of bustie CB.
• Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine.
• RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine.
• Optional control of primer pump for AE.
• Optional control of fuel selection for AE.
• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
• Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr).
• Load sharing between generators.
• AVR set point control (optional).
Generator protection (C3)
The C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators.The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage andcurrent transformers as well as switchboard equipment. Themodule has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independentof external indicators. The C3 module is available in two versions:
• C3-GP: Generator Protection
• C3-GDCP: Generator & differential current protection
The module has a dual 24VDC power connection, to uniterruptiblepower supply and generator voltage.
• Short circuit tripping of generator CB.
• Over current tripping of generator CB.
• Reverse power tripping of generator CB.
• Optional differential current protection.
• Local indication of reason for trip.
• Local reset of tripping.
• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).
• Calculation of phase angel between voltage and current (cosineϕ).
1.4.8 Gateways
General
Two types of gateways are available.
Functional description
27AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• The System Gateway: Used as a redundant gateway betweenCAN-bus and Local Area Network.
• The dual Processing System Controller: Used as a redundantgateway between two CAN segments (sections of theCAN-bus).
The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolationbetween different parts of the network and to segregate process bustraffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between thenetwork parts, while maintaining redundancy.
Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (DistributedProcessing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units andLocal Operator panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If thecommunication with one node fails, the gateways will generate asystem failure message identifying the node and the failure. TheDual Process System Controller may also be equipped withsupervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.
The System Gateway – SGW
The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual LocalArea Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages fromthe two CAN-buses, and update the Remote Operator Stations.Handling of operator commands and downloading of parametersand software from the Remote Operator Stations to the nodes(Distributed Processing Units and Local Operator Stations) arehandled as well.
The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messagesbetween the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messagesneeded in more than one bus segment, typically messages forinhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down.
The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message convertersending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels andunits having Process Data Segment located on the Local AreaNetwork. The converter function will pre-process CAN messagesand load them into a local database for distribution. The other waythe converter will convert messages from Process Data Segmentand route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units,or Local Operator panels).
All necessary configuration and software installation is donethrough the Local Area Network. The Simple NetworkManagement Protocol is implemented to gain access via the LocalArea Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases.Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24V power input andthe System Gateway interfaces.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
28 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)
The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CANgateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CANinterfaces. The two processors have separate power connections,and they share information via dual port memory.
In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel andprovide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and forlogic functions. The main function is to process messages from thelocal CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus,where they are available for other dual Process SegmentControllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commandsand downloading of parameters and software from any SystemGateway or Remote Operator Station to the Distributed ProcessingUnits connected to the local CAN-bus.
When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set ofDistributed Processing Units, both processors are working inparallel running the same process algorithm. In this function thedual Process Segment Controller operate as a running back-up.
The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serialinterface (RS422/485), primarily designated to communicate withother manufacturers equipment. Galvanic isolation is providedbetween the power connections and the CAN-bus, and between thetwo CAN-buses. The main features are:
• Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanicisolated processors.
• Possible to power the two processors from separate powersupplies.
• High speed data-link between the two processors.
• A node with CANopen master capability on all four CANchannels.
• Redundant routing of messages between local and global CANsegments.
• Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS422/485 tocommunicate with other vendors equipment.
• Various redundant application process control logic. When thetwo processors in the dual Process Segment Controller iscontrolling the same Distributed Processing Units they areworking in parallel running the same process algorithm.
Functional description
29AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5 Software components
1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface
Operator control panel
The Operator Control Panel is either available as a dedicated panelor displayed and operated from the colour graphics display usinga standard PC keyboard and mouse. The Operator Control Panelinclude the following main functions:
• Alarm display selection and acknowledgement.
• Selection and set-up of information to be monitored.
• Set-up and activation of logging (printing).
• Parameter adjustment.
• Extended Alarm and watch-calling functions.
When only monitoring facilities are required the panels controlfunctions can be inhibited.
Figure 13 Remote Operator Stations.
Alarm and monitoring display
A number of display windows are available for presenting alarmsand monitored values. Alarm windows include:
• Alarm group display (activated by the group alarmpush-buttons).
• Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages.
• Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stampedalarm messages.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
30 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Monitoring windows include:
• Group display containing a list of all measuring points withinan alarm group.
• Information display for a selected point.
• Tag details giving detailed information about each measuringpoint in the system.
Process mimics, bargraphs & status displays
The system can include (as an option) a number of standard displaypictures for common information from the engine and surroundingequipment. The standard mimic windows are:
• Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph.
• Bar graphs.
• Trend curves.
In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for eachproject according to the piping diagrams. These display windowsshow the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped,% filling etc.) and are interactive, allowing operation of theequipment.
Logging/hard copy
All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selectedpoints log can also be configured to print at specified intervals. Thefollowing logging function are available:
• Alarm log (time stamped alarm and return to normal).
• Selected points log.
• Complete log.
• Group log.
• Inhibited points log.
• Autolog.
All alarms are printed in red. A separate deskjet printer can befitted to print mimic display windows as an option.
Self-checking and diagnostics
The Distributed Processing Unit’s have an on-line Built InSelf-Test (BIST) system, that monitors the units temperature,power, and sensor excitation.
Testing of the Remote Operator Stations and their ability to givealarms according to the requirements, is initiated by pushing the“alarm test” push-button on the Operator Control Panel. Inaddition, the electronics is automatically tested when power isturned on.
Functional description
31AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Access control
In order to limit or enable control of the process from any RemoteOperator Station an advanced passwords system is available .Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the useof passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags(optional).
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
32 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5.2 System functions
Alarm block
Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when aspecified condition is present. For instance when the main engineis stopped the lubrication oil pressure falls and should normallyhave triggered an alarm condition. Since this is quite normal thealarm is blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as aninhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend theblocking situation.
Alarm acknowledge
It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarmgroup or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgementfor separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is donethrough a single push of the same pushbutton.
Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring
The DataChief C20 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates thedeviation between the individual cylinders and the average valueof all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds theacceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated basedon the engine load. The deadband is set narrower as the engine loadincreases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping andsensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account.
Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are when relevantmade. The maximum number of cylinder for each engine orcylinder bank is 12. As the average temperature is used as referencefor the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of eachcylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference.This correction is done when running the engine at full load. Whenthe average temperature is below a preset value, the deviationalarm is blocked.
Trend monitor
The DataChief C20 automatically records selectedmeasurements, and store them for use in the trend monitoringsystem. This system can present recorded data for all variables ascurves. The trend monitor is part of the Remote Operator Station.Two functions are available; “Select Trend” and “Display Trend”.
The “Select Trend” function assigns the display of trend curves tospecified variables. The operator can specify five different trenddisplays with eight variables each, giving a total of forty recordedvariables display.
Functional description
33AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The “Display Trend” function displays the selected trend ascontinuous curves. The present value is at the right hand side of thedisplay window while the previous values are displayed towardsthe left. Each curve has an assigned colour.
The trend display gives tag name, tag description and thenumerical actual value of eight variables at a time.
Fuel performance system (optional)
The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumptionand assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To studyperformance parameters momentary values are available.Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such asfor a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting.
Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units makingcontinuous measurements. The following sensor data are required:
• Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine.
• Both input and output flow must be measured.
• Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows.
• Running signal for each propulsion engine.
• Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft.
• Ship speed.
Based on these measurements the following performanceparameters are calculated:
• Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs.
• Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs.
• Hull efficiency in kg/nm.
• Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh.
• Shaft power for each shaft in MW.
• Total shaft power in MW.
Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyageperiod. Accumulated data includes:
• Duration of voyage in hours.
• Distance travelled in nautical miles.
• Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons.
• Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons.
• Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh.
• Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
34 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so,the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fueleconomising measurements and calculations are available as adisplay window on any of the Remote Operator Stations.
Running hours & counters
To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which componentsneeds overhauling, it is important to know the running hours foreach component. The DataChief C20 running hours functionkeeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans,compressors, purifiers & generators etc., and present the result tothe operator on demand.
Any status signal interfaced to the DataChief C20 can be used tocount running hours. Two separate counter functions are available:
• Counter for total active running hour.
• Lap counter.
A table containing all parameters and their running hour valuescanbe printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when unitshave been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be madeto the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.
Functional description
35AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5.3 Process control functionsAll data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling andprocess control is performed by each individual DistributedProcessing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation isavailable even if the Remote Operator Stations are not functioning.
Stand by pumps
General
Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations intwo ways:
• Through the stand by pump mimic diagrams.
• Through a mimic diagram included in the monitoring andcontrol system.
Stand by start at low pressure
When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pumpautomatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analoguesensor is used.
Inhibit stand by start
Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at agroup start, until the pressure has built up. The stand by logic canalso be inhibited by an external condition, such as “main enginestopped”, “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition.
Restart after blackout
Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout.These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time definedin the Distributed Processing Units pump logic determines the startsequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing.
Group start of pumps
Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.
Alarms from the stand by pump logic
• Stand by start alarm.
• Auto start fail or trip.
• Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longerin stand by mode).
Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used forthe control functions.
Limits: All limits are downloaded from the remote OperatorStation as part of its database. Limits may be adjusted from RemoteOperator Station or at the Local Operator Station.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
36 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pumpsystem, the signals from the motor starters and the process arenormally routed to different Distributed Processing Unit’s. Thisconfiguration allows the system to work even if one of theDistributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is alsoactive when the Remote Operator Station is down.
Valve control
General
Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stationsthrough mimic diagrams.
Valve Types
Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digitaloutput signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by thesignals by one or two limit switches.
Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digitaloutput and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed bypulsing a relay.
Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type iscontrolled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analoginput signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead bandby pulsing a relay.
Additional functions
In addition, the following functions are available as part of thevalve control system.
• Pulsed output.
• Automatic closing of a set of valves.
• Automatic opening or closing of valves.
• Close on an analog setpoint, using deadband.
• Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSEfunction. Close when a “low level” switch opens.
• Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSEfunction. Close when a “low level” switch opens.
• Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.
PID controllers
The PID controller system is a set of software modules located inthe appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. All combinations ofPID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished byconnecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can beconfigured from the Local or Remote Operator Station. Thefollowing parameters are available:
Functional description
37AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time).
• Controller setpoint.
• Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve positioncontrol mode, SEMIAUTO).
• Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID).
• Selection of input and output signal type.
• Input and output channel number.
• Sampling time.
Compressor control
The compressor control system is a set of software modules locatedin the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The mainpurpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value.This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stopof compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control.
The compressor control system communicates with the Local orRemote Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled fromhere.
Purifier control
The purifier control system is a set of software modules located inthe appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The purifier controlprogram is specially written to operate Alfa Laval‘s self cleaningoil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment:
• Crude oil booster pump (optional).
• Crude oil temperature controller.
• Purifiers.
• Sealing valves.
• Discharge valves.
The equipment may be controlled from the Remote or LocalOperator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually byoperating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier controlprogram will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel.Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic display by showing theoil path as green lines. Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier,whereas purifier no.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
Boiler control
The boiler control system is a set of software modules located theappropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. These The programconsists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to differenttypes of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checkingextensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, andprovides visible alarms.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
38 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Boiler system parameters are available on the Local or RemoteOperator Station. All parameters are found in the steam systemmimic display. System information such as alarms and analoguevalues are part of the normal DataChief C20 alarm andmonitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of thefollowing equipment:
• Fuel oil standby pumps.
• Burner motor.
• Fuel pre heater.
• Nozzles.
• Ignition unit.
• Air damper.
• Steam release valve.
These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriateDistributed Processing Unit.
Functional description
39AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.5.4 Power management system
Introduction
The power management system controls the power generation anddistribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automaticfunctions necessary for safe and economic operation of the powerplant.
The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit perconnected genearator unit. Each perform the power managementfunctions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitablefor electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbineor by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units havedifferent configurations and control strategies depending on thetype of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected toRemote Operator Station (Remote Operator Station) which allowsthe operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functionsthat can be performed locally.
For complex Power management Systems an additionalDistributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode controletc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function andcommunication, and allows separation of local PMS CANprocessbus data traffic from other the global CAN-network of theDataChief C20 system.
The power management system will be adapted to the specificconfiguration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. Inorder to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions foralarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed toseparate Distributed Processing Unit’s like this:
• Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (whenneeded).
• PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 foreach generator.
• Diesel generator Safety system: A separate DistributedProcessing Unit RiO C1.
• Bus-tie Control: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 foreach Bustie.
• Alarms: To Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units.
Note: These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
40 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Generator Control Functions
Synchronizing
The power management system automatically selects andsynchronizes generators to the net as required. A DistributedProcessing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequencyand breaker.
Frequency Control/Loadsharing
When automatic mode is selected, one of the DistributedProcessing Units must be defined as Master. The DistributedProcessing Unit designated as “ No.1 Stand-By “ willautomatically be master if no other master selection is made. Thebus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboardare available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Mastermode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequencyand voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency bycontrolling its engine’s speed. The Master mode DistributedProcessing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-byDistributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.
Asymmetric Loadsharing
The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalancedload-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almostmaximum load for a pre-defined period, while the secondgenerator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. Atthe expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads.
Symmetric Loadsharing
If two or more generators are running and asymmetricload--sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equallybetween the generators.
Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators
Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automaticallystart, synchronise and connect its generator according to itsassigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of thefollowing requests:
• Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generatorsin operation cannot provide enough power.
• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit whenits operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents itfrom maintaining its share of the load.
• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit whenits operating generator is approaching the point of overload.
Functional description
41AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature.Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running,independent of the load parameters. This feature is especiallyuseful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship’s bow thruster) isrequired to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals.
Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.The powerblackout logic is triggered when the power management systemdetects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltageis low. (<10% of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of thegenerators controlled by each stand-by Distributed ProcessingUnit will start and connect to the bus.
Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on
Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-oncontrol heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not causea power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity ofthe operating generators, the power management system will startup and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficientcapacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.
Power Management Functions with ShaftGeneratorMain Functions
One Distributed Processing Unit control the Shaft GeneratorDistributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed ProcessingUnits control the bus tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators.The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptableto various switch board configuration.
The following functions are available:
• Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tiebreaker with automatic synchronisation.
• Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and sternthruster.
• Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that controlthe auxiliary generator sets.
Operational Modes/Mode Control
The power management system allows many different modes ofoperation. The following standard modes are provided, anexample with 1 SG, two DG’s, two busties and a bowthruster:
• Harbour: Both DG’s running. Both busties closed. This modeallows the bow thruster to be started. If load is low, andbowthruster not running the standby DG will automatically bedisconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster isrunning or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel GeneratorDistributed Processing Unit is activated.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
42 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• At sea: The SG is running. Both busties closed. The bowthruster is blocked for starting. Both DG’s are stopped andstandby ready for start.
• Cargo handling: Bustie 2 is open. One or two DG’s powerconsumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is poweringheavy consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster isblocked for starting.
• Manoeuvre: Bustie 1 is open. One or two DG’s powerconsumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bowthruster only.
Transition between these modes is possible in two ways:
• Mode control: Selection of one of the predefined operationalmode, leading to a set of actions which the operator has toperform in order to put the Power Generating System into thatmode.
• One-Touch Mode Control: Selection of one of the predefinedoperational mode, leading to a sequence of automatic events toput the Power Generating system into that mode. Thisone-touch control to be made from the Remote OperatorStation.
Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering thenet to auxiliary generators powering the net or to split netoperation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit willgive a start and connect command to at least two auxiliarygenerators. Upon reception of this command, the powermanagement system will only start one diesel at a time.
Shaft Generator OverloadThe Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check foroverload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than apredefined period of time, a request for split net is generated.
Shaft- And Auxiliary Generator In ParallelThere is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing betweenshaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically bedisconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit.
Shaft Generator Control FunctionsThe shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control andalarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator DistributedProcessing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unithas facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop functionversus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel withdiesel generators.
When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the followingfunctions are available:
Functional description
43AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams
• Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams
• Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaftgenerator itself
• Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator isrunning. (Additional function to controller, with its own safetyfunctions for the shaft generator)
When the shaft generator is connected, the master DistributedProcessing Unit will do loadsharing on the diesel generator inparallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the busbar is aresult of the ME speed. Parallel load sharing between shaftgenerator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled fromthe Power Management System.
The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and theDistributed Processing Units perform the functions for the PowerManagement System completely independent of the Alarm- andMonitoring System.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
44 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1.6 Technical specifications
1.6.1 IntroductionThe following is a summary of the technical specifications for theDataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with processcontrol and power management. Kongsberg Maritime ShipSystems is engaged in continues development of its products andreserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.
1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP)• Supply voltage: 24 V DC, ± 5% ripple (Input filter included)
• Power consumption: 4 W Nom (12 W when lamp testactivated).
• Ambient operational conditions: 0_C to + 70_C insideconsole.
• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
• Production burn-in: + 70_C for 72 hours
• Type approved by classification societies: DNV, LRS, BV,GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China).
• Cable connections:
- Power terminal: 2.5 mm2
- Signal terminal: 2.5 mm2
• Cable length to PC: 2,5 m.
• Weight of unit: 4 kg (cables and terminals 0.5 kg)
• Dimensions: W482.6 H265.8 D45 mm.
• Panel cut-out: W450 +1 H257 + 1 mm.
• Mounting: Flush mounting with screws or free standing incabinet.
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): The OperatorControl Panel complies with the classification societyrequirements regarding electrostatic discharge, radiatedsusceptibility and conducted susceptibility. In addition it isprepared to meet the EU directive valid from 1.1.96 regardingradiated emission and conducted emission.
1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC ±5 % ripple.
Functional description
45AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Power consumption: 10 W.
• Ambient operational temperature: -15_C to + 70_C
• Max. rel. Humidity: 96% non-condensing.
• Ambient storage temperature: 25°C to +70°C in a dry areawith approx. 70% humidity.
• Display: TFT colour, 5.7”, 320 x 240 pixels.
• Housing: Cast aluminium back, polycarbonate front.
• Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.
• Dimensions: W252 H144 B70 mm.
• Panel cut-out: 242 x 134 mm.
• Mounting: Bracket for table, ceiling and wall. Flush mountwith removable corners.
• Shock and vibration: DnV Class B, IACS E10 (Direct mounton engines, compressors, etc.).
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, IEC 60945.
1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS)• Supply voltage: 18 – 32 V DC
• Power consumption: 6 W
• Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
• Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
• Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.
- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
• Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: 6 W
• Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
• Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
46 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
• Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: 6 W
• Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing
• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C
• Weight of unit: 1.4 kg.
• Dimension:
- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.
• Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)
1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption:
- Module Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W- Current mode sensors add Nominal 9W, Max. 11
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDCcontinues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated: (DC/DC Converter)- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt
reference.- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
Functional description
47AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Signal types:
- Input differential: CMV 10 [ V ]
- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10 [Volt]
- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]
- Technical units: Free range
Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD):
- Scaling: PT100, PT1000 [Ω]
- Range: PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,0-800ºC
• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %
• Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.4 %
• Sensor excitation voltage and current: 30-40 mA nominal.Fused at 100mA per channel or 350 ma for the whole module,with overload indicator.
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 1.6 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: Input: Differential CMV 10[V]. ISO per modulein power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0Volt reference.
- CAN Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
48 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Signal types:
- Thermocouples with Cold Junction compensation- According to IEC 584- Element: R/S/J/E/N 0-200, 0-600ºC- Element: B 0-600ºC- Element: T 0-200ºC- Element: K 0-200, 0-600, 0-1200ºC- Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD)- Scaling PT100, PT1000 [Ω]- Range PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,
0-800ºC• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %
• Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.5 %
1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 &RDi-32a)
• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 8W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 1.8 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDCcontinues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
RDi-32:
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).- Input: Supplied from 24V DC Main power- Power: Isolated from Module chassis- RDi-32a:- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).- Input: Isolated between channels (Opto coupler)- Power: Isolated from Module chassis
Functional description
49AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Signal types: On/off
• Specification:
- RDi-32: Dry contact
- RDi-32a: Active signal 24VDC or AC (50-70 Hz)
• Sensor excitation voltage and current: only for RDi-32 6 mA@ 24VDC nominal.
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 8.5W, Max. 10W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDCcontinues 50 VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Voltreference.
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
• Signal types:
- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10[Volt]
- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]
- Technical units: Free range
• Accuracy: Voltage conversion D/A ±0.1 %
• Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.4 %
• Resolution: 12 bit
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
50 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Bandwidth: 10 [Hz]
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 8.0W, Max. 10W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 1.6 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Signal types: Digital Output
• Specification: All outputs max. 3 Amps 230V AC Relay:Resistive load 1 pole change over contact.
• Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 10.5W, Max. 12W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
Functional description
51AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 2 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Isolation: Ref.: Engineering Guide 656
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
• Digital output: – - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).Relay for resistive load 1 pole change over (NO/NC). Solid statefor inductive load (solenoid driver in parallel) 24V DC.
• Analogue output:
- Range: ±22mA
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.5 [%]
• Analogue input ACV (1-phase):
- Input: Max. 30Vrms
- Voltage Scaling: 30 [Volt]
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 [Hz]
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy w/ signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]
• Analogue input IAC:
- Input: Max 1A
- Current scaling: 0-1A
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]
• Input from pickup:
- 24V DC (counter input): – - 5 KHz
• Analogue/digital input, flexible: – - For details, see separatedata sheet for RAi-16.
• Digital Input: – - For details, see separate data sheet forRDi-32.
• Derived calculated variables:
- KW active power
- KVAr reactive power
- COS ϕ
- Frequency
1.6.13 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
52 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Power consumption: Nominal 8W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV Class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 1.8 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• 2 ways isolation:
- I/O Communication.
- Power Communication.
• Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 230VAC
- Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over.
• Digital input:
- Dry contact, high side or low side switch
- Sensor excitation voltage and current: 6 mA @ 24VDCnominal.
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
• Isolation:
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
- Input: Isolation between channels (Opto coupler)
- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)
- Power: Isolated from module chassis
1.6.14 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C3)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 15W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,compressors, etc.)
Functional description
53AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• 3 ways isolation:
- I/O Communication.
- Power Communication.
- Power I/O
• Serial interfaces: 2 CAN ports for redundant communicationinterface (galvanic isolated).
• 4 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).
- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
• 3 phase ACV input:
- Input: Max. 35Vrms
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt
- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
• 3 phase IAC. Generator current (MSB):
- Input: Max 15A
- Current scaling: 0-5A
- Over current scaling: 0-15A
- Maximum readable input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Technical units: free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
- Over current: 5 %
• 3 phase IAC. generator current (internal):
- Input: Maximum 15A
- Current scaling: 0-5A
- Maximum readable input: 5A
- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s
- Technical units: Free range
- Accuracy: 1 %
• 3 Digital Input:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
54 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Trip display and reset switch: Local 7-segment display onmodule, reason for trip indication. Reset switch on module.
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.15 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C4)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: Nominal 15W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,compressors, etc.)
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 2.0 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• 3 ways isolation:
- I/O Communication.- Power Communication.- Power I/O
• 8 Digital output:
- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay)- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.
• 2 ACV input (bus and generator):
- Input: Max. 35Vrms
- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz- Technical units: Free range- Accuracy: 1 [%]
• 1 phase IAC. generator current input:
- Input: Max 15A- Current scaling: 0-5A
- Maximum readable input: 5A.- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s- Technical units: Free range- Accuracy: 1 %
Functional description
55AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• 4 Digital inputs:
- Require dry contact or opto coupler.
• 2 Analogue output:
- Range: 22mA and 11V
- Accuracy with signal conditioning: 1.0 %
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller(VCC)
• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC
• Power consumption: 12 W
• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C
• Ambient storage temperature: - 25_C to + 70_C
• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- Maximum 0.7g
• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of unit: 3.8 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Isolation:
- Isolation between input terminal and ground: 2000VAC
- Isolation between input terminals: 2000VAC
• 2 ACV output synchronisation:
- 1 phase generator and 1 phase bus.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
• 3 phase ACV output protection:
- 3 phase generator.
- Range: 0-24VAC
- Accuracy: 1.0 %
• 1 DC output (Protection backup power):
- Voltage: 24VDC
- Maximum current: 1000mA
- Accuracy: 5.0 %
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
56 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.
1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler(PSS)
• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
• Power Consumption: Nominal 4 W Max. 5 W
• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C
• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV class B
- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)
• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of module: 1 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller(dPSC)
• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC
• Power Consumption: Nominal 12 W Max. 15 W
• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C
• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C
• Maximum relative humidity: 96% non-condensing
• Mechanical environment:
- DnV class B
- IACS E10 ( Direct mount on engines, compressors etc. )
• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945
• Weight of module: 1.6 kg.
• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)
Functional description
57AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50VAC 1 minute.
• Isolation:
- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)
- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
- Serial line: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
58 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 GETTING STARTED
2.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the control functions anddisplays of the different DataChief C20 operator stations. It isintended for personnel just starting to use the system. Thefollowing subjects are covered:
- Using the Remote Operator Station
- Using the Midi Operator Station
- Using the Local Operator Station
- The Watch Calling System
- Using the Watch Bridge Unit
- Using the Watch Cabin Unit
Getting started
59AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station
2.2.1 Understanding the OperatorControl Panel
The Operator Control Panel often called OCP is a speciallydesigned keyboard that provides easy access to the operatorfunctions. It is divided into separate function areas. Push buttonsare combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of theExtendedAlarm System and to indicate main system functions.
OverviewThefollowingillustrationshowsthelayoutof theOperatorControlPanel. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided intogroups and are explained in the following.
Red LEDs - alarm group buttonsGreen LEDs - watch function buttonsYellow LEDs - project dependent buttons
Power on LED
Keyboardconnector
Numerickeyboard
Standard function buttons
Trackballbuttons
Trackball.
Alarm functions & display buttons
Mimic buttons
Standard function buttons
Figure 14 Operator Control Panel (OCP) layout.
Numeric keyboard and trackball buttons
DELETE Used to delete numeric input (from right toleft) during an input sequence.(Backspace).
SPACE Used for passive settings for alarm limits etc.
ENTER Ends a sequence of numeric input or acti-vates editing.
PREVI-OUSPAGE
Displays the previous page in the selectedpage group.(Page Up)
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
60 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
NEXTPAGE
Displays the next page in the selected pagegroup.(Page Down)
ARROWBUTTON
Used to move the cursor or the high--lightedfield. There are four arrow keys; left, right, upand down.
READ Used for addressing an object (i.e. pump,valve) after placing the cursor over it by mov-ing the trackball.
DE--ACTIVATE/ STOP
Used for giving a STOP, CLOSE or DEACTI-VATE command to an object after addressingit using the READ button.
ACTIVATE/ START
Used for giving a START, OPEN or ACTIVATEcommand to an object after addressing itusing the READ button.
Alarm group buttonsLO, FO, FW, EX,CW, CA, DO, BW,MI, DS, BO, BR,OM, DG, SG, ES,FI, TS, ST, LS….
When a new alarm occurs, the correspondingalarm group lamp starts flashing, and thealarm buzzer is activated. To display informa-tion about the alarm, push the button. Newalarms are displayed in red colour, acknowl-edged alarms in yellow. The indicator stopsflashing when all alarms in the group havebeen acknowledged, but remains lit until allalarm conditions have returned to normal.
INHIBIT POINTS When this button is pushed, the colourgraphics display shows a list of inhibitsources.
SYSTEM FAILURE When a system failure occurs, the correspon-ding indicator starts flashing, and the alarmbuzzer is activated. To display informationabout the system failure, push the button. Theindicator stops flashing when the alarm hasbeen acknowledged, but remains lit until allalarm conditions have returned to normal.
Alarm function and display buttonsSOUND OFF When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer and
engine room horn is activated. Push theSOUND OFF button to stop it.
ALARM SUMMARY Shows all active and unacknowledged alarmson the colour graphics display. Up to twenty-six alarms can be displayed simultaneously. Ifthere are more alarms, use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to see themall.
Getting started
61AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
ALARM HISTORY Displays the last 2000 alarm events, with timeand date. Twentysix alarms are displayed oneach page. The last alarms are at the top ofthe list. To turn the pages, using the NEXTPAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons.
ALARMACKNOWLEDGE
This button is used to acknowledge alarms. Ifan Operator Control Panel group button hasbeen pushed, the alarm acknowledge buttonwill acknowledge all unacknowledged alarmson the colour graphics display. If more than 26new alarms have occurred, the next page willautomatically be displayed. If an OperatorControl Panel alarm group button has notbeen pushed, pushing the Alarm Acknowl-edge button will acknowledge the latest threealarms displayed in the lower right corner ofthe display.
Standard function buttonsCOUNTERSDISPLAY
Displays counters and lap counters informa-tion.
DEVIATIONPARAM. CONFIG.
Menu for input and display of parameters fordeviation calculation of exhaust gas tempera-tures.
GROUP / ALARM Toggles between all measuringpoints and thepoints in a group having an alarm status.
GROUP DISPLAY Displays all measuringpoints within an Oper-ator Control Panel alarm group.
SELECTEDBARGR. DISPLAY
Displays preselected measuringpoints as bar-graphs.
SELECTEDPOINTS DISPLAY
Displays preselected measuringpoints.
SELECTED TRENDDISPLAY
Display preselected measuringpoints as trendcurves.
SET DATE & TIME Used to adjust date & time.
SYSTEM INFODISPLAY
Displays system parameters and functions.
TAG DETAILS Menu used to display details for measuring--points and to change their parameters.
Logging buttonsAUTO LOGCONFIG
Menu used to enable and adjust the auto logprintout time.
MISC. LOGS Menu used to activate printout of logs and setup the printer.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
62 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Tank and cargo functionsSHIPS DISPLAY Displays total volume for each tank content
type. Trim/list and draught display. Menu formanual trim/list specification and input andsea specific gravity input.
LEVEL CORR.DISPLAY
Display of raw level/ullage, corrections fortrim, list, sensor offset, specific gravity andcorrected level/ullage.
GENERAL TANKDISPLAY
Tank level [m], filling [%], volume [m3], spe-cific gravity [t/m3] and weight [t] display.
SEA HARBOURSELECT
Toggles between SEA and HARBOUR mode.This can be used to suppress tank alarmsduring the voyage.
CARGO TANKDISPLAY
Tank content type, ullage [m], actual tempera-ture [ºC], volume [m3], filling [%], volumecorrection factor, volume at 15 ºC [m3], weightair and US Barrels at 60 ºF.
CARGO APIDISPLAY
Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15ºC,density in air at 15ºC, density in air TºC, tem-perature (T) [ºC], density correction factor anddensity at actual temperature.
Mimic display buttonMIMIC DISPLAY Displays mimic window for process monitoring
and/or process control.
Control functions buttonsHIGH / LOW Toggles between high and low speed of
pumps and fans.
RESET Reset function for controllable objects such aspumps, fans, compressors and generators.
MASTER Master function for pumps, fans, compressorsand generators.
1.ST. STAND BY 1.st standby or stand by selection function forpumps, fans, compressors and generators.
NEXT STAND BY Stand by selection function for pumps, fans,compressors and generators.
AUTO / MAN Auto/manual (semi auto) mode selection forpumps, fans, compressors, controllers andgenerators.
Viewing conditions and testing buttonsMONITOR OCPDISPLAY
Menu to decreasing or increasing illuminationfor the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and co-lour graphics display on the Bridge.
ALARM TEST To test the alarm buzzers, alarm display, netcommunication and alarm printer push thebutton. To turn the test off push the buttonagain.
LAMP TEST To test all indicator lamps on the OperatorControl Panel push the button.
Getting started
63AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Watch indication and calling functions buttonsBRIDGE WATCH Initiates Bridge Watch (unattended engine
room). This means that the engine watch re-sponsibility is transferred to the bridge.
ENGINE WATCH Initiates Engine Watch. This means that theengine watch responsibility is in engine con-trol room mode.
CHIEF ENG. ONDUTY
When this indicator lamp is lit the Chief En-gineer is on duty, both in bridge-- and enginewatch. The ON DUTY indicator in the ChiefEngineers cabin and in the engineers day-rooms are lit.
CALL ALLENGINEERS
When this button is pushed, the indicatorlamp starts flashing, and the indicators andbuzzers in all WatchCall panels in the en-gineers quarters are activated. To deactivatethis function push the button again.
ENGINEERSON DUTY
When one or more of the 1st to 4th engineeron duty lamps are lit, the engineer on duty isin charge of the watch. The ON DUTY indica-tor in the engineers cabin and dayrooms arelit.
CALL DUTYENGINEER
When this button is pushed the indicator lampstarts flashing and the indicators and buzzeron the WatchCall panel in the duty engineersquarter is activated. To deactivate this func-tion push the button again.Note: This function is only available as analternative to a 4th Engineer button.
2.2.2 Systems without Operator ControlPanel
Some systems are delivered without Operator Control Panels.Thesesystemsareoperated through standardkeyboard andmouse.In these systems the Operator Control Panel is displayed on thecolour graphics monitor. Operation is similar for both types ofsystems.
1 Push the F1 function key to display the Operator ControlPanel.
2 Use the mouse to push the buttons and select the variousdisplay pages.
The following fuction keys are used:
- F1: Operator Control Panel (OCP) display
- F2: Alarm/group display
- F3: Sound off
- F4: Alarm acknowledge
- F5: Tag tetails
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
64 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 15 Typical Operator Control Panel displayed onmonitor.
2.2.3 Understanding the displayThe Remote Operator Station includes a standard colour graphicsdisplay. The operator interacts with the display through theOperator Control Panel or through keyboard and mouse.
Overview
The following illustration explains the layout of the RemoteOperator Station display.
• Aboutbutton:Push thebutton to display information about thesoftware version etc.
• Title window: Contains the title of the information currentlydisplayed in the main window.
Getting started
65AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Title window
Status window
Main window
Function window
Alarm window
Time window
About button
Figure 16 Main areas of the Remote Operator Station display.
• Status window: The status window is divided into twocolumns. These contains important status information for usersettings. The following abbreviations are used:
- Buz - OCP buzzer disabled.
- ACK - Acknowledge limitation override enabled.
- Mim - Mimic access override enabled.
• Time window: Shows current date and time.
→ Refer to page 107 for information on “How to change time zone”.
• Main window: Contains the main display information such asalarmlists,bargraphs, trenddisplays,configurationdata,mimicdiagrams etc.
• Function window: Displays information related to user input.
• Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent ofthe information displayed in the main window.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
66 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.3 Using the Midi Operator Station
2.3.1 Overview
The Midi Operator Station, often called MOS is a speciallydesigned operator panel that provides easy access to operatorfunctions. It is used as a local operator station in larger systems oras the main operator station for more limited systems.
The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exactcopy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentationdepends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.
2.3.2 Understanding the keyboard
Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at anytime, other key functions are related to certain menu(s) and canonly be applied when in the appropriate menu.
Escape
Function keysF1 to F4
Page down
Page up
Sound off
Acknowledge
Clear
Figure 17 Keyboard layout.
Escape. Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in upto five steps by pushing repeatedly.
Turns menus on. The displayed menu will vary with theoperational context.
Go to submenu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data.Gives access to set-up displays.
ESC
MENU
ENTER
Getting started
67AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Page up. Moved the displayed information up a page in the selectedgroup.
Page down. Moved the displayed information down a page in theselected group.
Sound off. Push to turn audible alarms off.
Alarm acknowledge.
Four-way navigator key. Moves a square cursor up/down to selecttext in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down andto select objects in mimic pictures.
Function keys. The function is specified by the text next to the key(left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoidaccidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active thefunctions keys again.
Alpha-numeric keys for insertion of letters and numbers. Push thebutton repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed.
Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push thebutton repeatedly until the desired character is displayed.
Clear. Deletes data in enter or edit mode.
2.3.3 Understanding the displayThe midi operator station includes a bright colour flat paneldisplay. The operator interacts with the display through thekeyboard.
• Window title: Contains the title of the information currentlydisplayed in the main window.
• Menu window: Displays the various menus available.
• Scroll bar: Indicates how much of the total information in thiswindow is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standardWindows applications).
• Alarm window: Displays the last alarm independent of theinformation displayed in the main window.
ACK
F1 - F4
0 - 9
.-_
CLR
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
68 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm window
Scroll bar
Window title
Menu window
Figure 18 Display layout example.
Indicates thatadditionalfunctionbuttons areavailable. Usethe Page upand PageDown buttonsto displaythem.
Alarm window
Window title
Figure 19 Display layout example including graphics.
Getting started
69AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm window
Indicates thatadditionalinformation isavailable. Usethe navigatorkey to displayit.
Scroll bar
Figure 20 Display layout example.
2.3.4 Menu overview
The following menus are available:
Main Menu
1 Alarm Menu
2 DPU Overview
3 Tag Selection Menu
4 Configuration Menu
5 Help
Alarm Menu
1 Alarm History
2 Alarm Summary
3 Alarm Group Display
Tag Menu
1 Tag Details
2 Mimic
3 Alarm Status
4 Main Menu
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
70 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Tag Selection Menu
1 Control Menu
2 PMS Menu
3 MMI Tags
4 All Tags
Control Menu
1 Pumps
2 Valves
3 Controllers
4 Standby Sets
PMS Menu
1 Power Manager
2 Switch boards
3 Generators
4 Aux Breakers
5 Sync Breakers
Configuration
1 User Access
2 Keyboard/Screen
3 Advanced
4 Printer
5 Self check
Getting started
71AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.4 Using the Local Operator Station
2.4.1 Understanding the Local OperatorStation
Overview
The Local Operator Station is used for local access to theDistributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables,local operation of equipment, adjustment of parameters andinspection of the built-in diagnostics.
DPU002
LOS
DPU003
DPU004
DPU001
CAN A
CAN B
dPSC
dPSC
Figure 21 Local Operator Station on CAN bus segment.
The Local Operator Station (LOS) can connect to all DistributedProcessing Units (DPU) connected to the same CAN-bus. Fromthe local operator station you select a Distributed Processing Unit.As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Stationis able to control it.
On lineindicator
Pushbuttons
Alarm indicators
- Display Line # 1 : Menu Name Line -----------
- Display Line # 2 : Top Menu Item /Selection Line
- Display Line # 3 :
- Display Line # 4 : Prompt Texts for F1,F2,F3,F4
Display
Alarm indicator 6
Figure 22 Local Operator Station layout
The functions available are defined by the functionality of eachindividual type of Distributed Processing Unit. Pushbuttons arecombined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the extendedalarm system and to indicate main system functions. The Localoperator Station has the following main functions:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
72 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
IndicatorsOn Line Indicates that the Local Operator Station is
connected to an active Distributed ProcessingUnit.
Alarm 1 -- 5 These alarm indicators are active in an alarmsystem application. Labels are ship depend-ent.
Alarm 6 -- Unit Fail Indicates that the Local Operator Station isunable to get in touch with a Distributed Pro-cessing Unit.
Other LED indica-tors
Many of the buttons have LED indicators.These indicators have different meanings de-pendent on the menu being operated.
DisplayLine 1 Displays module name, menu name, tag
name etc. The display text depends on themenu selected.
Line 2 Displays the menu item that will be selected ifthe Menu Down button is pressed
Line 3 Application dependent information
Line 4 Application dependent information
Push buttons
oMENUUP
Used to return to the menu level above thecurrent menu.
iMENUDOWN
Used to select a more detailed menu for theitem currently displayed in the second displayline.
uSELECTUP
Used to scroll the three bottom lines on thedisplay to select a new menu, a tag or a para-meter. Display lines are scrolled down.
dSELECTDOWN
Used to scroll the three bottom lines for selec-tion of a new menu, a tag or a parameter Dis-play lines are scrolled up.
+ADJUSTUP
Used to adjust the value of the selected para-meter (displayed in the second line). Thevalue is increased.
-ADJUSTDOWN
Used to adjust the value of the selected para-meter (displayed in the second line). Thevalue is decreased.
rDEFAULT Used to jump to the first item in the selected
menu.
eENTER Used to confirm value adjustment and store
adjusted value.
p
n
ARROWBUTTONS
Navigation and adjustment buttons. Used toswitch between overview 1 and 2. Used toforce maximum adjustment speed, and to se-lect next and previous tags when Tag Detailsare displayed.
Getting started
73AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1F1--F4 Function buttons, the function depends on the
selected menu.
aACK Used to acknowledge alarms.
sSOUNDOFF
Used to turn the alarm sound off.
tTEST Used to verify that lamps and buzzer are
functioning. Also used by the Local OperatorStation menu for other tests.
LOS top menu
DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_
DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_
DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
RAi16 Top Menu
Alarm History
Alarm Summary
Tag Overview Menu
RAi16 Tag Overview
1
2
3
48
Tag Details An.Input
Parameter Explanation
DPU 004/01.00.23 _RAi16_
ALARM DETAILS
ALARM DETAILS
Figure 23 Typical Local Operator Station menu structure.
2.4.2 Menu structureThe Local Operator Station menu structure is a tree structure,similar to that found in many Microsoft Windows programs.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
74 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Use the MENU UP and MENU DOWN buttons to gobetween different menu levels.
2 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll up and down each menu.
2.4.3 How to access menusThe Local Operator Station can only be connected to oneDistributed Process Unit at a time. Selecting the DistributedProcess Unit is done from the Local Operator Stations Top Menu.Do the following:
- At power on the LOS top menu will automatically bedisplayed.
1 If the top menu is not displayed, repeatedly push the MENUUP button until the LOS top menu is displayed.
- Depending on the application, the display may looksomething like this:
LOS top menu;Select dpu:>DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_ DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_ DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_
Figure 24 Local Operator Station top menu
- The LOS top menu presents a list of available DistributedProcessing Units (DPU) on the CAN bus.
2 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll the list of Distributed Process Units.
3 To view data for a Distributed Processing Unit move itsname to the second line in the display.
4 Push the MENU DOWN button to activate the top menu forthat Distributed Processing Unit.
- The online indicator is lit.
Getting started
75AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.4.4 How to move between menu levels
1 Moving from one menu level to another, is done by pushingthe MENU UP or MENU DOWN buttons:
2.4.5 How to move inside a menuAfter selecting a Distributed Processing Unit (see “How to accessmenus” above) the top menu for that unit is displayed. Dependingon the unit type, the display may look something like this:
- RAi16 top menu --- DPU 001/01.00.20>Tag Overview Menu Alarm History |Discon|
Figure 25 Distributed Processing Unit top menu.
1 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll the list of menu items for that Distributed ProcessingUnit.
2 When the desired menu item is displayed on the second line,push the MENU DOWN button. This activates that menuitem.
3 To leave this menu item and return to the LOS top menu,push the F1 button.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
76 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.5 The watch calling system
2.5.1 OverviewThe watch calling system is designed to allow periodicallyunmanned engine-room. It consists of:
• Watch Bridge Units (WBU).
• Watch Cabin Units (WCU).
• Remote Operator Station.
The Watch Bridge Units are used for• Indicate Watch Responsible area.
• Indicate who is On Duty.
• Indicate the current alarm status.
• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs andsomeone is On Duty.
• Allows you to contact (call) duty personnel.
The Watch Cabin Units are used for• Indicates who is On Duty.
• Indicates the current alarm status.
• Indicates when you are being called and who is calling.
• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs.
Figure 26 Basic Watch Calling System components.
2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeatalarm feature work
The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors allresponses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm isacknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarmsusing three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not gounacknowledged:
Getting started
77AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The second-time/1st repeat alarm:
After a set period of time, if the alarm remains unacknowledged,it is repeated and relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
The third-time/2nd repeat alarm:
After a set period of time, if the alarm is still not acknowledged,it is repeated and relayed to:
- The area designated as Watch Responsible.
- The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers.
- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
78 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit
2.6.1 Explanation of controls andindicators
Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available:
• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and sevenalarm groups.
• The LED-type has nineteen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of thetwo types.
LAMP TESTPush to check
that all indi-cators are OK.
SYSTEM FAILIndicates thatthe unit hasfailed.
Indicates theofficer having
on-duty status.
Indicate if theengineers safetysystem is active.
Used to call onduty officers.
Indicates the locationhaving watch
responsability.
Used to scrollalarms on thedisplay
These alarmsare divided intogroups forhandling anddefining priority.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selectedpoints summary or time display.
Used to displayTAG DETAILS.
SOUND OFFPush to silencethe buzzer.
Figure 27 Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type.
SYSTEM FAILIndicates thatthe unit hasfailed.
Indicates theofficer having
on-duty status.
Indicate if theengineers safetysystem is active.
Indicates the locationhaving watch
responsability.
Used to increaseor descreasetext illumination.
These alarmsare divided intogroups forhandling anddefining priority.
LAMP TESTPush to check
that all indi-cators are OK.
Used to call onduty officers.
SOUND OFFPush to silencethe buzzer.
Figure 28 Watch Bridge Unit, LED type.
Getting started
79AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD typecan display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has alarger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date andtime when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators willbe dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is notacknowledged within a set period of time.
2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LEDtype panels
1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrowbuttons.
2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCDtype panels
1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECTand use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrowbuttons.
2.6.4 How to test the panel1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and
the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace thepanel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
80 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit
2.7.1 Explanation of controls andindicators
Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available:
• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and sixalarm groups.
• The LED-type has seventeen alarm groups.
The following illustrations describes the main functionality of thetwo types.
Indicates theofficer having
on-duty status.
Indicates that youhave been called.
Used to scrollalarms on thedisplay
These alarmsare divided intogroups forhandling anddefining priority.
LAMP TESTPush to check
that all indi-cators are OK.
Used to displayTAG DETAILS.
Used to SELECT alarm summary, selectedpoints summary or time display.
SOUND OFFPush to silencethe buzzer.
SYSTEM FAILIndicates thatthe unit hasfailed.
Figure 29 Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type.
LAMP TESTPush to check
that all indi-cators are OK.
Indicates theofficer having
on-duty status.
Indicates that youhave been called.
Used to increaseor descreasetext illumination.
These alarmsare divided intogroups forhandling anddefining priority.
SOUND OFFPush to silencethe buzzer.
SYSTEM FAILIndicates thatthe unit hasfailed.
Figure 30 Watch Cabin Unit, LED type.
Getting started
81AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The main difference between the two types are that the LCD typecan display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has alarger number of alarm groups.
- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date andtime when no-one is ON DUTY.
- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators willbe dark when no-one is ON DUTY.
- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is notacknowledged within a defined period of time.
2.7.2 How to respond to alarmsWhen an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarmis indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:
1 Push SOUND OFF.
2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next tothe indicator.
3 Take appropriate action.
4 Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarmsituation no longer exist.
2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LEDtype panels
1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrowbuttons.
2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCDtype panels
1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECTand use the arrow buttons.
2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrowbuttons.
2.7.5 How to test the panel1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and
the buzzer sounds.
- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace thepanel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
82 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM
3.1 IntroductionThis chapter contains a detail descriptions of how to operate theDataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system from the differenttypes of operator stations. It is intended for users already familiarwith the “Getting Started” section of this manual.
The following subjects are covered:
- Remote Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- ShipViewer
Figure 31 DataChief C20 Operation.
Alarm and monitoring system
83AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2 Remote Operator Station
3.2.1 How to handle alarm events
When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the followingtakes place:
- The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed.
- The alarm group indicator on the Operator Control Panelstarts flashing.
- The buzzer in the Operator Control Panel is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of thecolour graphics display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horn areactivated.
Do the following:
1 Push the SOUND OFF button.
- This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.
2 Push the flashing alarm group button.
- This display(s) the alarms on the colour graphics display inred.
3 Push the ALARM ACK. button.
- This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.
4 Attend to the alarm situation.
Note The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on thelower right side of the colour graphics display and may beacknowledged without selecting group display.
3.2.2 How alarms are printed after ablack-out
Loss of ships power
The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Remoteoperator stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separateuninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain powerfor 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unittimestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. Thistimestamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printedout according to the time they were detected.
SOUNDOFF
ALARMACK
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
84 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Loss of power to Remote Operator StationsThe Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information.If the Remote Operator Stations loose power the the system willcontinue to operate, and can be monitored or controlled from theLocal Operator Stations. When power is restored to the RemoteOperator Stations all alarms are sorted and printed out accordingto the time they were detected.
Loss of power to Distributed Processing units
If you loose power to the Distributed Processing Units the systemwill not be working for the duration of the power interruption. Allsettings are how ever retained and as soon as power is restored thesystem will be up and running.
3.2.3 How to display alarm summaryThis function will display all active alarms. Do the following:
1 Push the ALARM SUMMARY button.
- A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms aredisplayed on the colour graphics display.
2 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.
3.2.4 How to display alarm historyThis function displays a chronological list of alarm events. Do thefollowing:
1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.
- A complete chronological list of all alarm events aredisplayed on the colour graphics display. The newest alarmsare displayed on top.* Unacknowledged alarms are displayed in red.* Acknowledged alarms are displayed in yellow.* Cleared alarm conditions are displayed in green.
2 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.
3.2.5 How to display alarm groupinformation
This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The valueand alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following:
ALARMSUMMARY
ALARMHISTORY
Alarm and monitoring system
85AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left ofthe colour graphics display.
2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushthe desired alarm group button on the Operator ControlPanel.
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at thetop.
3 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.
3.2.6 How to display counters and resetcounters
This function is used to view running hours for pumps, mainengine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The totalaccumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do thefollowing:
- Requires that “Reset Counters” is enabled→ See “How to enable resetting of counters” on page 96.
1 Push the COUNTER DISPLAY button.
- The system counters are displayed.
2 A counter value may be changed by using the UP/DOWNarrow keys to highlight it.
3 Push ENTER to address it.
- The prompt Enter new Counter value: is displayed in thelower left of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the new counter value.
5 Push ENTER.
- It is possible to reset all counters selecting Reset allcounters or Reset all lap counters.
→ See “How to display system information” on page 92.
3.2.7 How to display offscan alarmsThis function is used to view tags set to offscan. The value andalarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following:
GROUPDISPLAY
COUNTERDISPLAY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
86 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left ofthe colour graphics display.
2 Type in -2 (minus 2).
3 Push ENTER.
- Offscan tags are displayed.
4 Use the PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.
3.2.8 How to toggle between group andalarm display
Do the following:
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left ofthe colour graphics display.
2 Type in a group number, or push the desired group button onthe Operator Control Panel.
3 Push ENTER
- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at thetop.
4 Push the GROUP/ALARM button.
- For each push of the button the display toggles between alltags and tags in alarm state.
3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarmsSeparate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-,an alarm group- or an alarm summary display is active. There arethree ways to acknowledge alarms:
Method 1
To acknowledge up to tree of the active alarms displayed in thelower right corner of colour graphics display do the following:
GROUPDISPLAY
-
2
GROUPDISPLAY
GROUPDISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
87AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Push the ALARM ACK. button.
- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the sametime. Any unacknowledged alarms will replace those justacknowledged.
Method 2
Do the following:
1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.
- The alarm history is displayed.
2 Push the ALARM ACK. button.
- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the sametime. The alarm text turns yellow. When the alarm conditionreturns to normal, the text turns green.
Method 3
Do the following:
1 Push the ALARM GROUP button.
2 Push the ALARM ACK. button.
- All active alarms shown on the colour graphics monitor areacknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarmspush PAGE DOWN to acknowledge the additional alarms.The alarm texts changes from red to yellow. When all alarmshave been acknowledged the alarm button is steady lit. Whenall alarm conditions in the selected alarm group havereturned to normal, the colour graphics display is cleared.
3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or nightviewing conditions
When the Remote Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in asimilar places it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, duskor night viewing. You can also turn the screen saver on/off andadjusting the time delay before the screen saver is turned on.
Monitor Dimmer Function
1 Push the MONITOR OCP DISPLAY button.
ALARMACK
ALARMHISTORY
ALARMACK
ALARMGROUP
ALARMACK
MONITOROCP
DISPLAY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
88 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to selectDay, Dusk/Dawn or Night.
3 Push ENTER.
4 Push 1.
5 Push ENTER.
- The selected viewing condition is set.
OCP Dimmer Function
6 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to selectthe lamp intensity you wish to change.
7 Push ENTER.
8 Type in a number between 1 and 7.
9 Push ENTER.
- 7 will give the brightest light.
Screen Saver
10 Use the arrow buttons or the trackball to select Screen SaverDelay.
11 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new delay in minutes (0 to turn saver off):is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
12 Type in the delay time.
13 Push ENTER.
- Maximum delay time is 60 minutes.
Note The screen saver is automatically turned of if any of the inputdevices are activated or a new alarm occurs.
3.2.11 How to print a Complete logA remote operator station can only be connected to one printer.This printer will have a defined function:
• Alarm printer
1
1-7
Alarm and monitoring system
89AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Log printer
If there is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve bothfunctions. Do the following to activate printouts:
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select Complete log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Complete log (1=start, 0=abort) is displayedin the lower left of the display.
4 Push 1 to select printout.
5 Push ENTER.
- The printer starts printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logswill go back to READY.
M/S EAGLE NORCONTROLAUTOMATIONA/S DC2000KALDNES HULL NO: 10COMPLETE LOG 93--12--27 12:16:45 PAGE 1
Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.
AE001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )AE002 CHARGEAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME002 CYL.1 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME003 CYL.2 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME004 CYL.3 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME005 CYL.4 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
Figure 32 Typical example of Complete log.
3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summerylog
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Alarm Summary.
MISC.LOGS
1
ALARMSUMMARY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
90 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Level Correction.
3.2.14 How to print a Tank log
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Tank log.
3.2.15 How to print a Counters log
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Counters log.
3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Inhibit log.
3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log
- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Offscan log.
3.2.18 How to print Group logDo the following to activate printouts:
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select Group log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Select group log: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.
4 Type in the group number.
5 Push ENTER
6 Or push one of the alarm group buttons.
7 Push ENTER.
- The printer will start printing the log.- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs
will go back to READY.
LEVELCORRECTION
TANKLOG
COUNTERLOG
INHIBITLOG
OFFSCANLOG
MISC.LOGS
Alarm and monitoring system
91AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.19 How to print a Selected points logA Selected points log can only be printed from the RemoteOperator Station fitted configured to do that.
Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the intervalset for printing of Selected points log.
→ See “How to set interval for Selected points log” on page 111.
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select Sel. Points Log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Selectlog number: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.
- The note “Selected Log Interval will be deleted” isdisplayed.
4 Type in the number (between 1 and 5) of the selected pointslog you wish to print.
5 Push ENTER .
- The printer starts printing the log.
- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.
- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logswill go back to READY.
3.2.20 How to stop a printout
1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.
2 Select the log you want to stop using the UP/DOWN arrowbuttons.
3 Push ENTER.
4 Push 0 to stop the printout.
- The printing stops when the printer buffer is empty.
Printer responsible parameters
- These parameters indicates which Remote Operator Stationis responsible for printing alarms and logs.
MISC.LOGS
MISC.LOGS
0
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
92 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Printer set-up parameters
- A list of current printer settings, such as printer type andform feed length. The later is useful when ordering printerpaper. These parameters are normally set duringcommissioning.
3.2.21 How to display system information
This function is used to display various system information suchas ship and station information, software version, functions,limited access override etc. and allows further access to displayingand controlling system parameters. Do the following:
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
3.2.22 About password access
An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledgealarms and change system parameters or information. The statusof this system is available by pushing System InformationDisplay.
Figure 33 System Information Display.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
93AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The access control system is based on the use of passwords. Thefollowing password levels are available:
- Acknowledge: Allows acknowledging of alarms. Used toreceive and acknowledge alarms from Remote OperatorStations that normally wouldn’t receive them, such as on thebridge. When typing in the password you can also set theexpiration time.The password expiration time can be set toany number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will notautomatically expire. Push the Release Access button in TagDetails or change the status to NO in the SystemConfiguration Display.
- Mimic: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) componentsyou normally don’t have access to, such as for instanceoperating the power management from the cargo controlroom. The password expiration time can be set to anynumber of minutes. When set to 0 the password will notautomatically expire. Push the Release Access button in TagDetails or change the status to NO in the SystemConfiguration Display.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
94 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 34 Password window.
- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarmdelays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for eachRemote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button inTag Details.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Accessautomatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing theRelease Access button in Tag Details.
- Password: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delaysand event limits. This password does not automaticallyexpire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details orchange the status to NO in the System ConfigurationDisplay.
- Yes: In the System Configuration Display indicates thataccess at this level is available.
- No: In the System Configuration Display indicates thataccess at this level is not available.
Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allowsunauthorized access to vital system functions.
If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.
3.2.23 How to display DistributedProcessing Unit information
This procedure allows display of all parameters for each tag suchas values , alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
95AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Unitdisplay.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lowerleft side of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the number of the DPU.
5 Push ENTER.
- The information about the selected processing unit isdisplayed.
6 Use NEXT PAGE or PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to selectthe next or previous Distributed Processing Unit.
3.2.24 Info field enable- This parameter is for Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems use
only.
3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Eng.unit change.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Eng.unit counts/change enable (1=on, 0=off):is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
4 Type 1.
5 Push ENTER to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts.
→ Refer to page 117 for information on “How to change tagparameters for an analogue channel” and page 120 forinformation on “How to change tag parameters for a digitalchannel”.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
1
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
96 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.26 How to enable resetting ofcounters
This function is used to reset counters for running hours for pumps,main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Resetcounters.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Reset all counter enable (1=on, 0=off): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
4 Type 1 .
5 Push ENTER to enable resetting of all counters in theCOUNTERS DISPLAY.
→ Refer to “How to display and reset counters” on page 85 formore information.
3.2.27 How to override limitations toacknowledge alarms
This function allows acknowledging of alarms from RemoteOperator Stations which would not normally allow it.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterAcknowledge.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter acknowledge limit. override password:is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
4 Type in the password.
5 Push ENTER.
- The text Acknowledge limitation override enabled isdisplayed in the function window.
- You may now acknowledge alarms from this RemoteOperator Station.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
1
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
97AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK will be displayed in the statusarea until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.28 How to override limitations tocontrol pumps and valves
This function allowscontrolling of pumps and valves from RemoteOperator Stations which would not normally allow it.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterMimic.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter mimic limit. override password: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
4 Type in the password.
5 Push ENTER.
- The text Mimic access override enabled is displayed.
- You may now control pumps and valves from this RemoteOperator Station.
Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM will be displayed in thestatus area until the override is reset, refer page 65.
3.2.29 How to silence the OperatorControl Panel buzzer
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after OCPBuzzer silent.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter OCP Buzzer disable password: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
4 Type in the password.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
98 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 Push ENTER.
- The Operator Control Panel (OCP) buzzer is now disabled.
Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed in the statusarea until the disabling is turned off, refer page 65.
3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue
channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digitalchannel.
3.2.31 How to change alarm limits→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue
channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digitalchannel.
3.2.32 How to change alarm delay→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue
channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digitalchannel.
3.2.33 How to access the Watch Callingconfiguration
This function allows configuration of the Watch Calling System.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterConfiguration Menu.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter 1 to Configure Watch Call: is displayedat the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 Type 1.
5 Push ENTER.
- The Watch Calling configuration pages are displayed.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
1
Alarm and monitoring system
99AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 Use the use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGEbuttons to go between the pages.
3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineerThe engineer to be assigned to On Duty must have qualificationsthat comply with the on duty assignment. The system verifies eachduty assignment by checking the engineer qualifications table. Amessage will appear on the screen if the engineer is not qualifiedfor the assigned duty. The following example shows the procedurefor selecting an engineer:
Officer On DutyOfficer Qual.Duty
f Chief Engineer E Nf 1st Engineer E Ef 2nd Engineer E Nf 3rd Engineer N Nf Chief Cargo M Nf 1st Cargo C C
Figure 35 On Duty engineer including qualifications.
Explanation to the abbreviations:
* E - Engine duty
* C - Cargo duty
* M - Multipurpose duty
* N - No qualifications
- This procedure requires that the system is in “engine controlroom watch”.
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration“ on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theOn Duty engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Officer on Engine duty (1=Engine duty): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
100 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 Type 1.
6 Push ENTER.
- The engineer On Duty has been set - the indicator turnsgreen.
3.2.35 How to select the WatchResponsible location
Note This procedure requires that an engineer is set to on duty. Refer to“How to set the On Duty engineer“ above.
The engine control room is the default Watch Responsiblelocation. Use the following procedure to select an alternativeWatch Responsible location. This can be done in the followingthree ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH).
- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel onthe bridge.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibilityhas been accepted. The indicator for the previous location isswitched off - not lit.
On the Watch Bridge Unit
1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH buttons).
- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Remote Operator Station inthe engine control room.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibilityhas been accepted. The indicator for the previous location isswitched off - not lit.
On the Remote operator station display
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration“ on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
1
Alarm and monitoring system
101AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theWatch Responsibility Area.
Responsibilityf Bridge WatchF Engine CR Watch
Figure 36 Watch responsibility location before change.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate operation (1=active): is displayed atthe lower left side of the colour graphics display.
5 Type 1.
6 Push ENTER.
ResponsibilityF Bridge Watchf Engine CR Watch
Figure 37 Watch responsibility location after change.
- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel onthe bridge.
- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibilityhas been accepted. The indicator for the previous location isswitched off - not lit.
3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineeror All engineers
From the Remote Operator Station, you can call the On Dutyengineers, or All engineers with engine or cargo qualifications, orwith engine and cargo (multipurpose qualifications). Thefollowing is an example for calling all qualified engineers (Call AllEngine) and for calling the On Duty engineers (Call Engine Duty)Individual ship configurations may vary. This can be done in thefollowing three ways:
On the Operator Control Panel
1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.
- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
1
CALLDUTYENG.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
102 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 To cancel the call push the button again.
On the Watch Bridge Unit
1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.
- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
2 To cancel the call push the button again.
On the Remote operator station display
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration“ on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theengineers to call.
Calling officersf Calling Engine Dutyf Calling Cargo DutyF Calling All Enginef Calling All Cargo
Figure 38 Calls all engine qualified officers.
Calling officersF Calling Engine Dutyf Calling Cargo Dutyf Calling All Enginef Calling All Cargo
Figure 39 Calls the On Duty engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Activate call (1=Activate): is displayed at thelower left side of the colour graphics display.
5 Type 1.
CALLALL
ENG.
CALLDUTYENG.
CALLALL
ENG.
1
Alarm and monitoring system
103AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 Push ENTER.
- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.
7 To cancel the call repeat the procedure selecting CANCELCALL (0=cancel):.
3.2.37 How to define the engineerqualifications
When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications differentfrom the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs tobe updated. The following example shows a qualification changefor the the 3rd engineer:
Officers Qualifications
Officers Qualifications
Chief Engineer Engine1st Engineer Engine2nd Engineer Engine3rd Engineer EngineChief Officer Multipurpose1st Officer Cargo
Figure 40 The qualification section checks that the On Dutyengineer is qualified for the assigned duty.
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration“ on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select thequalifications for the engineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter qual (0=None, 1=Engine, 2=Cargo,3=Multipurpose): is displayed at the lower left side of thecolour graphics display.
5 Type the relevant number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The new qualifications have been set.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
104 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.2.38 How to define watch callingOff-Duty mode
When an engineer or group of engineers are on duty the WatchBridge and Watch Cabin units are automatically set to On Dutymode. When an engineer is Off Duty “his/her” panel(s) can bedefined as either “active” or “passive”:
What is Off Duty active
The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to displayalarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” infront.
What is Off Duty passive
The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display“date and time” information only. Pushing the controls on aLCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarmswill have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels willremain dark).
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration” on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theengineer.
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter panel(s) mode(1=Active, 0=Passive): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
5 Type the relevant number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The new Off-Duty mode have been set.
Alarm and monitoring system
105AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Off-Duty Panel Mode
Officers Mode
Chief Engineer Active1st Engineer Passive2nd Engineer Passive3rd Engineer PassiveChief Officer Passive1st Officer Passive
Figure 41 engineers Off-Duty panel mode.
3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panelgroups for on duty engineers
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels inhis/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is Onduty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since eachships configuration is different the illustration may differ fromyour system.
Note This configuration can only be done at the master RemoteOperator Station.
1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration” on page 98.
2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select thepanel group (Chief Engineer, 1st Engineer etc.).
4 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter Group number to assign panel to: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
5 Type the relevant number.
6 Push ENTER.
7 Type in the group number.
8 Push ENTER.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
106 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
KONGSBERG WATCH CALLING CONFIGURATION 1 of 2 DateTime
Message area which tells you the codes to choose the selection.
1. Public2. Chief Engineer3. 1st Engineer4. 2nd Engineer5. 3rd Engineer6. Chief Officer7. 1st Officer
Panel ConfigurationGroup Mode Last ChangePanel S/N
000000000000010000000000000200000000000003000000000000040000000000000500000000000006000000000000070000000000000800000000000009
Chief Engineer1st Engineer2nd Engineer3rd EngineerChief Officer1st OfficerPublicPublicPublic
OperationalOperationalConnectingOperationalOperationalOperationalOperationalOperationalOperational
11:07:41 08/11--200112:00:00 12/12--200102:03:00 06/10--200110:10:23 07/10--200110:22:09 07/10--200110:28:34 07/10--200110:32:27 07/10--200110:44:12 07/10--200110/56:02 07/10--2001
This column lists the time anddate of change for each panel
GroupsEach panel has a unique serial number. Each panel can bedefined to a ”group” so that all alarms to the ”On Duty”officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and topublic areas.For example, all panels defined as ”Chief Engineer”will be active when the Chief Engineer is ”On Duty”.
Apply Changes
Figure 42 One of the Watch Calling configuration pages.
9 Place the cursor on the display area APPLY CHANGES andpush the READ button.
- The change is now selected.
10 To apply the change push 1.
11 Push ENTER.
Groups
1. Public2. Chief Engineer3. 1st Engineer4. 2nd Engineer5. 3rd Engineer6. Chief Officer7. 1st Officer
Figure 43 Available Watch Cabin Unit groups.
1
Alarm and monitoring system
107AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Panel Configuration
Panel S/N Group
00000000000001 Chief Engineer00000000000002 1st Engineer00000000000003 2nd Engineer00000000000004 3rd Engineer00000000000005 Chief Officer00000000000006 1st Officer00000000000007 Public00000000000008 Public00000000000009 Public
Figure 44 Panel serial numbers and group assignment.
3.2.40 How to change time zoneUsed to change time zone when sailing eastward or westward.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterTimezone.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed in the functionwindow at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the password.
5 Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.
6 Select the new time zone and push OK.
Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must bemade there.
3.2.41 How to change system timeNote Use the “change time zone” function above when going between
different time zones. The DataChief C20 system time is set toCoordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), andonly minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct shouldbe made here!
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
108 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 45 Change Time zone dialogue box.
1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.
- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterChange system time.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter password: is displayed at the lower leftside of the colour graphics display.
4 Type in the password.
5 Push ENTER.
- The following dialogue is displayed.
Figure 46 Set system time dialogue box.
SYSTEMINFO
DISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
109AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 Type in the local date and time and push OK.
- The new date and time is transferred to the other RemoteOperator Stations in the network if the Remote OperatorStation you are working at is set up to transfer this data.
7 Select the time zone and push OK.
Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must bemade there.
3.2.42 How to make your own list ofselected tags
The system allows you to create up to five display pagescontainingyour own selection of tags. Each page can include up to 20 tags.Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do thefollowing:
1 Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.
- In the function window in the lower left corner of the colourgraphics display the text Log no. is shown.
2 Enter a number between 1 and 5.
Note If you want to create a new display the number should notpreviously have been used to create a selected points display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at thetop of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of thecolour graphics display.
5 Push the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags fromor enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on theright side of the colour graphics display.
7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.
8 Push ENTER to select it.
- The selected tag is displayed on the left side of the colourgraphics display.
SELECTEDPOINTSDISPLAY
1-5
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
110 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
9 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
10 To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.
11 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrowbuttons to highlight DELETE.
12 Push ENTER.
13 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
14 Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.
15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your list of selected tags is shown with values and limits.
3.2.43 How to change a list of selectedtags
Your list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Rememberthere is a maximum of 20 tags per list. Do the following:
1 Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the textSelect log number: is shown.
2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to change(between 1 and 5).
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to selectCONFIG in the lower right corner.
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at thetop of the screen.
4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD ifyou want to add tags and push ENTER. If you want toDELETE tags go to 9.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of thecolour graphics display.
5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on theright side of the colour graphics display.
SELECTEDPOINTSDISPLAY
Alarm and monitoring system
111AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.
7 Push ENTER to select it.
- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
8 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
- To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 6. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 4.
9 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrowbuttons to highlight DELETE.
10 Push ENTER.
11 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
12 Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.
13 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
14 Push ENTER.
- Your updated list of tags will be displayed with values andlimits.
3.2.44 How to set the interval forselected points log
Note A Selected points log can only be printed from the RemoteOperator Station configured to print this log.
1 Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the textSelect log number: is shown.
2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to log(between 1 and 5).
3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to selectCONFIG in the lower right corner.
- The texts ADD, DELETE ,EXIT and INTERVAL will bedisplayed at the top of the screen.
4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlightINTERVAL.
SELECTEDPOINTSDISPLAY
1-5
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
112 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter log printout interval (hh.mm): will bedisplayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display.
6 Type in the print interval using the specified format (hh.mm)and push ENTER.
7 Push the SPACE button and ENTER when you want toremove the interval.
3.2.45 How to make your own trenddisplay
The system allows you to create up to five different trend logdisplays containing your own selection of tags. Each display caninclude up to eight tags. Tags can be combined from differentalarm groups. The trend log displays input as curves as a functionof time. Do the following:
1 Push the SELECT TREND DISPLAY button.
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the textSelect log number: is shown.
2 Enter a number between 1 and 5.
Note The number should not previously have been used to create a trenddisplay!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at thetop of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom leftof the colour graphics display.
5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom or enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on theright side of the colour graphics display.
7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.
SELECTEDTRENDSDISPLAY
1-5
Alarm and monitoring system
113AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
8 Push ENTER to select it.
- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
9 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
10 To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.
11 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrowbuttons to highlight DELETE.
12 Push ENTER.
13 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
14 Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.
15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your trend display of selected tags will be displayed.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
114 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 47 Typical trend log display.
Explanation to the trendlog display
• Selected trend tags: Up to eight trend tags can be monitoredsimultaneously. These are displayed in different colours withtheir current value. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ keyto select one of the tags. The value scale will then be displayedin the actual unit (temp, pressure, etc.)for that tag, using trendlow and high range as minimum and maximum values. To selecttags see “How to make your own trend display” above.
• Value scale: Normally 0 to 100% - white scale. When selectingone of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags) the scale will bedisplayed in the same colour as that tag, and will be scaled in theunit for that tag.
- Trend low range: The minimum value for the value scale.Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trendtags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to selectit and type in a new value.
- Trend high range: The maximum value for the value scale.Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trendtags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to selectit and type in a new value.
• Time scale: The selected time scale for the trend display.
Alarm and monitoring system
115AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Time span: You can vary the time span of the trend displaybetween 6 minutes and 120 hours. Push the button so that thecurrent time span is displayed and use the UP/DOWN arrowkeys to change it.
• Grid: Pushing the button turns the grid on/off.
• Stop: Pushing the button freezes the trend display (no newsamples are added). Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys tomove the trend cursor along the time scale. The value for eachtag will be displayed as the cursor moves along the time scale.
• Config: Push this button to add or delete trend tags. See “Howto make your own trend display” above.
3.2.46 How to make your own bargraphdisplay
The system allows you to create up to five different bargraphdisplays containing your own selection of tags. Each display caninclude up to six tags. Tags can be combined from different alarmgroups. Do the following:
1 Push the SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY button.
- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the textSelect log number: is shown.
2 Enter a number between 1 and 5.
Note The number should not previously have been used to create abargraph display!
- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at thetop of the screen.
3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.
4 Push ENTER.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom leftof the colour graphics display.
5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom or enter the alarm group number.
6 Push ENTER.
- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on theright side of the colour graphics display.
7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want .
SELECTBARGR.DISPLAY
1-5
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
116 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
8 Push ENTER to select it.
- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
9 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.
10 To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.
11 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrowbuttons to highlight DELETE.
12 Push ENTER.
13 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.
14 Push ENTER.
- The tag is removed from the list.15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.
16 Push ENTER.
- Your bargraph display of selected tags will be displayed.
Figure 48 Typical bargraph display.
Explanation to the bargraph display• Selected bargraph tags: Up to six tags can be displayed
simultaneously. These are displayed with their current value. Toselect tags see “How to make your own trend display” above.
Alarm and monitoring system
117AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Tag number: The tag number for the selected tag.
• Scale: Bargraph scale
- Bargraph high range: The maximum value for the scale.Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it andtype in a new maximum value.
- Bargraph low range: The minimum value for the scale. Usethe TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and typein a new minimum value.
• Current value bar: The value of the tag displayed as abargraph.
• Current value: The current value of the tag. The numbers aredisplayed in green when the value is inside the limits and redwhen outside.
• Limits bar: Displays the minimum and maximum alarm limits- if any.
• Maximum alarm limit: The bar is green above this limit andred below.
• Minimum alarm limit: The bar is red above this limit andgreen below.
• Config: Push this button to add or delete bargraph tags. See“How to make your own bargraph display” above.
3.2.47 How to change tag parameters foran analogue channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analoguemeasuring points.
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom leftof the colour graphics display.
2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushone of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.
4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.
- The parameters for that tag is displayed.
5 There are three buttons at the bottom of the window. Pushthem to display the following:
GROUPDISPLAY
TAGDETAILS
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
118 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 49 Tag detail display.
* Tag Details: Shows the normal tag details display. Allparameters displayed here can be changed by theoperator. Pushing the Offscan Enable stops checking thistag against alarm limits. Pushing the Offscan Disablestarts checking this tag against alarm limits. PushingOffscan Value allows you to to insert a simulated valuewhen the tag is off scan. This may be used while waitingto replace a defective sensor.
* Advanced Tag Details: Shows a full list of all tag details.All parameters displayed in bold characters can bechanged by the user without a password. Use theParameter Filter on the right side to reduce the numberof parameters displayed.
* Tag application: Lists other tags related to this tag. Onlyused for advanced applications and systemcommissioning.
6 To change a variable point to it ,and push the READ buttonon the operator control panel.
7 Type in the new value and push OK.
- The display picture is updated and the new value istransferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any otherRemote Operator Station in the system.
The following table explains what the the different parameters foranalogue input tags are used for.
Parametername
Type Adjust-able
Function
Tag name Text Yes Unique code describing a tagTag number Number No Unique number describing a tagDescription Text Yes Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of
the tag
Alarm and monitoring system
119AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust-able
TypeParameternameValue Number No Measured value scaled to technical
value and Filtered
Distributed Pro-cessing Unitnumber
Number No Unique number of the node
Channel number Number No Number of the channel connectedChannel Type Channel type is the specification of how
the input signal is handled and scaled
Operator ControlPanel alarmgroup
Number No All tags in the system are divided intodifferent groups.
Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-tem are divided into different groups.
Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog listNoonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog listEventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog listOffscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log listInhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this
alarmLimit Alarm Low
LowNumber Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High
HighNumber Yes Alarm limit
Limit Event LowLow
Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High
HighNumber Yes Event limit
Filter Time *) Number Yes Time in 100 millisecondsDynamic Dead
Band *)Number Yes Report value dead band limit
Counts Low *) Number Yes A/D minimum valueCounts High *) Number Yes A/D maximum valueEng.Units Low *) Number Yes Instrument minimum valueEng.Units High
*)Number Yes Instruments maximum value
Alarm OnDelay1
Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
120 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust-able
TypeParametername
Alarm OffDelay1
Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Alarm OnDelay2
Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Alarm OffDelay2
Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second
Table 2 Analogue input channel parameters.
*) Requires Eng.Unit change = 1 in System info. display.
3.2.48 How to change tag parameters fora digital channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for digitalmeasuring points.
1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.
- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom leftof the colour graphics display.
2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushone of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.
- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.
3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.
4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.
- The parameters for that tag is displayed.
5 Use the arrow buttons to select the parameter you wish tochange and push enter.
6 Select for instance High-High alarm limit.
7 Push ENTER.
- The text Enter new limit: will be displayed on the lower leftside of the colour graphics display.
8 Enter a new limit.
9 Push ENTER.
- The display picture is updated and the new value istransferred to the Distributed Processing Unit.
GROUPDISPLAY
TAGDETAILS
Alarm and monitoring system
121AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The following table explains what the the different parameters fordigital input tags are used for.
ParameterName
Type Adjust-able
Function
Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagDescription Text No Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of
the tagState Text No Input status after time delay
Distributed Pro-cessing Unitnumber
Number No Unique number of the node
Channel number Number No Number of the channel connectedChannel Type Channel type is the specification of how
the input signal is handled and scaled
Operator ControlPanel alarmgroup
Number No All tags in the system are divided intodifferent groups.
Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-tem are divided into different groups.
Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog listNoonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog listEventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog listOffscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this
alarmEnable Event on
OpenYes/No Yes Enable/ disable event
Enable Event onClosed
Yes/No Yes Enable/ disable event
Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondAlarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondAlarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondSignal Cond. On
DelayNumber Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
system in 1 secondSignal Cond Off
DelayNumber Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
system in 1 secondSignal Cond In-
vertYes/No Yes Invert input status
Table 3 Digital input channel parameters.
3.2.49 How to change the AutologThe Autolog function is used to print logs a set intervals.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
122 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Altering autolog printing time
1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG. button.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the time,
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in thelower left of the display.
4 Type in the new time.
5 Push ENTER.
- The colour graphics display is updated with the new time.
M/S EAGLE NORCONTROLAUTOMATIONA/SKALDNES HULL NO: 10AUTO LOG 93--12--27 12:16:58 PAGE 1
Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.
AE001 STARTINGAIR LP 24.5 KG/CM2 ( 18.00, )AE002 CHARGEAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME002 CYL.1 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME003 CYL.2 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME004 CYL.3 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME005 CYL.4 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )
DC2000
Table 4 Typical example of an Auto log.
Deleting an autolog printing time
1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.
2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the start time to bedeleted.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in thelower left of the display.
4 Push the SPACE button and then ENTER.
- The selected start time is deleted.
AUTOLOG
CONFIG.
AUTOLOG
CONFIG.
Alarm and monitoring system
123AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Starting and stopping Autolog
1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.
2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight Autolog on/off.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Autolog on/off (1-on, 0-off) is displayed in thelower left of the display.
4 A prompt will occur at the bottom left of the screen: “on=1off=0”.
5 Type in 1.
6 Push ENTER to turn autolog on, or type in 0 and pushENTER to turn autolog off.
3.2.50 How to change Deviationparameters
How to change limits
This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking and deviationfrom corrected value such as used for main engine exhaust gastemperature.
1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.
2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight theparameter you want to change, for instance the limit foralarm blocking.
3 Push ENTER.
- The prompt Enter new value: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.
4 Type in the new value.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new value is displayed.
- Use this procedure to change any value on this display.
Note When the average temperature is below a preset value, thedeviation alarm is blocked.
AUTOLOG
CONFIG.
1
DEVIATIONPARAM.CONFIG.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
124 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 50 Typical Deviation parameter configuration display,your display may differ.
How to make profile correction
The average cylinder temperature is used as reference fordeviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperatureof each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders asreference. This correction is done when running the engine at fullload and can be done in two ways:
Automatic correction
1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.
2 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thetext Auto after “Profile correction”.
3 Push ENTER.
- All values found for “Current deviation:” are moved to“Correction:” and “Current deviation:” should read “0” forall cylinders.
Manual correction
1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.
2 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thetext Man after “Profile correction”.
DEVIATIONPARAM.CONFIG.
DEVIATIONPARAM.CONFIG.
Alarm and monitoring system
125AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thevalue for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type inthe value for each cylinder one by one.
- The value for each cylinder under “Current deviation:”should read “0”.
→ For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer topage 224.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
126 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.3 Midi Operator Station
3.3.1 How to handle alarm eventsWhen a process parameter enters an alarm state, the followingtakes place:
- The buzzer is activated.
- The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display.
- External alarm devices such as engine room horns areactivated.
- The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at thebottom of the display.
Do the following:
1 Push to turn any audible alarm off.
- This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.
2 Push the ACK button.
- This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of thedisplay (the last alarm).
- This alarm text disappears.
3 Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next to lastalarm and so on untill no alarms are unacknowledged.
4 Attend to the alarm situation.
3.3.2 How to display alarm history
Figure 51 Typical alarm history display.
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
ACK
ACK
MENU
Alarm and monitoring system
127AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3 Push 1 to display the Alarm History.
4 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allalarms a page at a time.
5 Push Enter to display alarm details.
3.3.3 How to display alarm summary
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
2 Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3 Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.
4 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allalarms a page at a time.
5 Push Enter to display alarm details.
3.3.4 How to display alarm groupinformation
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
2 Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.
3 Push 3 to display the Alarm History.
4 Use the Navigator key to select an alarm group.
5 Push Enter.
6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display allavailable information for each tag group.
1
1
ENTER
MENU
1
2
ENTER
MENU
1
3
ENTER
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
128 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7 Push Enter to display alarm details.
3.3.5 How to set the keyboard andscreen configuration
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
2 Push 6 to display the Configuration Menu.
3 Push 2 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.
4 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select theitem you want to change.
Keyboard light and screen backlight
5 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to set the newvalue.
6 Push Enter.
Keyboard click
7 Push Enter.
8 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select Onor Off.
9 Push Enter.
3.3.6 How to change access levelAn access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledgealarms and change system parameters or information. The statusof this system is available as follows:
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
2 Push 6 to display the Configuration menu.
ENTER
MENU
6
2
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
6
Alarm and monitoring system
129AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Push 1 to go to User Access.
- The user access levels are displayed.
* On: Indicates that access at this level is possible.
* Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.
Note Only one user access level can be selected at a time.
The access control system is based on the use of passwords. Thefollowing access levels are available:
- Monitoring: Only for viewing information.
- User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) componentsyou normally don’t have access to, such as for instanceoperating the power management from the cargo controlroom.
- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Accessautomatically expire after 30 minutes.
- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarmdelays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for eachRemote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after30 minutes.
Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allowsunauthorized access to vital system functions.
Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.
3.3.7 How to display information aboutDPUs, tags and tag details
Distributed processing units are often abbreviated DPU’s.
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.
3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allDPU’s a page at a time.
4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step througheach DPU one at a time.
1
MENU
2
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
130 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 For information about the tags for a particular DPU, selectthe DPU and push Enter.
6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display allavailable information for each tag.
Tag details view
7 Push Enter to display the parameters for a particular tag -Tag Details View.
Figure 52 Tag details display.
Tag menu
8 Push Menu.
9 The Tag Menu is displayed.
- This menu allows you to display various information abouteach tag as follows:
10 Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag - TagDetails View.
11 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use thefunction keys to operate the the tag when available.
12 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).
3.3.8 How to change tag parametersThis function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogueand digital measuring points.
1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
1
2
4
MENU
Alarm and monitoring system
131AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.
3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to select thedistributed processing unit.
4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select thedistributed processing unit you want.
5 Push Enter.
6 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to display allavailable tags for the distributed processing unit.
7 Push Enter to display the parameters for the selected tag.
8 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select theparameter you want to change.
- Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allowsa parameter to be changed:* Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current
access level setting.* Black parameter text: Parameter can be changed.
Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.
9 Push Enter.- A parameter entry window is displayed.
10 Clear the existing value using the Clr button.
11 Type in the new value.
Note A red text indicates that you have typed in an illegalvalue. If you make an error push Esc to cancel theinput.
12 Push Enter.
- The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated andthe new value is transferred to the Distributed ProcessingUnit and other Remote- and Midi Operator Stations in thesystem.
Analogue input tag parametersThe following table explains what the the different parameters foranalogue input tags are used for.
2
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
CLR
0 - 9
ESC
ENTER
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
132 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Parametername
Type Adjust-able
Function
Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagTag number Number No Unique number describing a tagDescription Text Yes Description of a tag
Distributed Pro-cessing Unitnumber
Number No Unique number of the node
Channel number Number No Number of the channel connectedChannel Type Channel type is the specification of how
the input signal is handled and scaled
Operator ControlPanel alarmgroup
Number No All tags in the system are divided intodifferent groups.
Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-tem are divided into different groups.
Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog listNoonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog listEventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog listOffscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log listInhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this
alarmLimit Alarm Low
LowNumber Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High
HighNumber Yes Alarm limit
Limit Event LowLow
Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High
HighNumber Yes Event limit
Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 millisecondsDynamic Dead
BandNumber Yes Report value dead band limit
Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum valueCounts High Number Yes A/D maximum valueEng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum valueEng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximum valueAlarm OnDelay1
Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Alarm and monitoring system
133AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust-able
TypeParametername
Alarm OffDelay1
Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second
Alarm OnDelay2
Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Alarm OffDelay2
Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second
Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second
Table 5 Analogue input channel parameters.
Digital input tag parameters
The following table explains what the the different parameters fordigital input tags are used for.
ParameterName
Type Adjust-able
Function
Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagDescription Text No Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of
the tagState Text No Input status after time delay
Distributed Pro-cessing Unitnumber
Number No Unique number of the node
Channel number Number No Number of the channel connectedChannel Type Channel type is the specification of how
the input signal is handled and scaled
Operator ControlPanel alarmgroup
Number No All tags in the system are divided intodifferent groups.
Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-tem are divided into different groups.
Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog listNoonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog listEventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog listOffscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list
Inhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this
alarmEnable Event on
OpenYes/No Yes Enable/ disable event
Enable Event onClosed
Yes/No Yes Enable/ disable event
Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
134 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust-able
TypeParameterName
Inhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondAlarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondAlarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondSignal Cond. On
DelayNumber Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
system in 1 secondSignal Cond Off
DelayNumber Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm
system in 1 secondSignal Cond In-
vertYes/No Yes Invert input status
Table 6 Digital input channel parameters.
3.3.9 How to change alarm limits→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
3.3.10 How to change alarm delay→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.
Alarm and monitoring system
135AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.4 Local Operator Station
3.4.1 How to view alarms
Note The following is only relevant when the Local Operator Station issett up as a local alarm system.
When an alarm occurs, the appointed Local Operator Station willdisplay the alarm message, sound the buzzer and activate the horn.The display will look like this:
Alarm!
|View| |Ignore|
Figure 53 Alarm display.
1 To silence the buzzer and horn, push SOUND OFF.
2 To go back to what was previously displayed on the LocalOperator Station push F4 (Ignore).
3 To view the new alarm push F1 (View), this will take you tothe top of the alarm history.
3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms- Unacknowledged alarms have an”*” in front of the alarm
message.
1 In the Alarm History, Alarm Summary and Alarm Details anunacknowledged alarm event or tag can be acknowledged byselecting it and pushing ACK.
2 The state will change from unacknowledged toacknowledged or back to normal if the alarm condition is nolonger present.
3.4.3 How to turn the sound off
1 To silence the buzzer and horn push SOUND OFF.
3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarmhistory
The Alarm history can be reached in two ways:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
136 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 When the alarm display is shown push F1.
2 Select Alarm History from the top menu.
3 Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH *12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High
Figure 54 Typical alarm history display.
- All Local Operator Station’s that can connect to aDistributed Process Unit can view its alarm history andacknowledge alarms.
- The alarm history is a list of the last 40 alarms for a specificDistributed Processing Unit. Alarms are sorted by time, thelast alarm event at the top.
- Line 1 of alarm history display shows current time and thetext ALARM HISTORY. The following lines display alarmevents.
- The “>” symbol indicates that the alarm is selected.
4 Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to move up anddown in the list.
5 The DEFAULT button moves you to the top of the list.
- Each alarm event line shows the following data:
Tag name
Alarm event typeIf no event for thistag the highestalarm state isdisplayed.
>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH
Alarm state* = Unacknowledged. = Acknowledged = Normal
Time of alarmeventDay of month,hours : minutes :seconds
EventAlm = AlarmRet = Return = No even
Figure 55 Alarm event interpretation.
Alarm and monitoring system
137AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 An unacknowledged alarm, in focus, can be acknowledgedby pushing the ACK button.
7 Push MENU DOWN or ENTER to display alarm details.
3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarmdetails
Alarm details is used to provide more information about an alarm.
1 Select Alarm History as described above.
2 Push ENTER.
3 Select the alarm you want Alarm Details for usingSELECT UP or SELECT DOWN.
4 Push ENTER.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFHMAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.2 DEG.C IFH
Figure 56 Alarm details display.
5 An unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged by pushingACK.
6 SELECT UP, SELECT DOWN and DEFAULT buttonscan be used to move up and down in the list.
- If the alarm conditions has returned to normal the field is leftblank.
7 Push MENU UP to return to Alarm History.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
138 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
HIGHEST ALARMSTATE PRESENT
*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFHMAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.7 DEG.C IFH
ENGINEERINGUNIT
TAGDESCRIPTION
CURRENTVALUE
Tag name
Alarm event typeIf no event for thistag the highestalarm state isdisplayed
EventAlm = AlarmRet = Return = No even
Alarm state* = Unacknowledged. = Acknowledged = Normal
Time of dayDay of month,hours : minutes :seconds
Figure 57 Alarm details interpretation.
3.4.6 How to display alarm summary
1 From the top menu select Alarm Summary and pushENTER.
- All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a DistributedProcess Unit can view Alarm Summary and acknowledgealarms.
- Alarm summary is a list of the last alarms orunacknowledged states. If the event have returned to normalthe tag data is still displayed and the alarm field will containthe highest alarm present.
Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM SUMMARY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH *12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High
Figure 58 Alarm summary display.
Alarm and monitoring system
139AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.5 Watch calling system
3.5.1 How to receive a call
- When you receive a call one of the watch location buttons areflashing.
1 Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call.
Figure 59 Buttons used to receive a call. Button texts will vary.
3.5.2 How to respond to alarms
When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and thealarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do thefollowing:
1 Push SOUND OFF.
2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next tothe indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receivethe alarm indicator and take appropriate action.
3 After a time check that the alarm is no longer displayed onthe Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.
3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer
1 Push the CALL XXX (button texts will vary) button tonotify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge.
- The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineerhas acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.
2 To terminated the call push the button again.
Figure 60 Buttons used to call on duty engineer. Button textswill vary.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
140 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.5.4 How to transfer watchresponsibility
1 Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the otherlocations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility.
- The LED indicator will flash until the transfer isacknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watchresponsibility has been transferred.
Figure 61 Buttons used to transfer watch responsibility. Buttontexts may vary.
3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility- When the indicator for your location begins to flash,
1 Push the button for your watch location.
2 This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watchresponsibility to you.
3.6 Watch Bridge Unit
3.6.1 How to display alarm informationwhen in off duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined aseither active or passive This is done as part of theconfiguration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
Alarm and monitoring system
141AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Off Duty ACTIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators andthe display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms.
- LCD-type panels will display date and time informationonly. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display thealarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
Figure 62 Watch Bridge Unit controls.
3.7 Watch Cabin Unit
3.7.1 How to display alarm informationwhen duty mode
- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined aseither active or passive This is done as part of theconfiguration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.
Off Duty ACTIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators andthe display will show alarm conditions.
Off Duty PASSIVE
- The panel will not sound alarms.
- LCD-type panels will display date and time informationonly. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display thealarms.
- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
142 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3.8 Using ShipViewer
3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functionsShipViewer has the following main functions:
• Counter display
• Alarm displays
• DPU displays
• Deviation displays
• Alarm group displays
• Alarm summery displays
• Alarm history displays
• Selected points display
• Selected trend display
• Selected bargraph display
• Mimic diagrams as found in the Remote Operator Station
3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewerdisplay
Overview
All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar andthe most frequently used functions are also directly availablethrough the toolbar buttons. These are further described in thefollowing.
Menu barToolbar buttons
Figure 63 ShipViewer menu and tool bar.
Toolbar buttons
Print screen
Save image to disk
Print preview
Open image file
Alarm and monitoring system
143AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Display version and build information
Previous window
Next window , for when you have used previous window
Alarm summary display.
Alarm history display
Alarm group display.
Running hours display.
DPU display.
Deviation display.
Colour codes for data displays
The channel data is colour coded as follows:
- Green: The channel is in a normal state.
- Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged.
- Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged.
- Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state.
- Blue: The channel is inhibited.
- Grey: Not updated or invalid values.
Thebackground colourcan be set to eitherdark blueor white.Darkblue is better to view some coloured texts, while white is better forprinting.
1 In the menu bar select Settings and either select or clear Nobackground color.
3.8.3 Explanation to the displays
Alarm summary display
The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries.Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are notdisplayed. The information is instantly updated as soon assomething happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
144 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm group display
The alarm group display shows all measuring points in thepredefined alarm groups. These group where defined duringcommissioning of the DataChiefC20. When selecting the alarmgroup display, a dialog containing all alarm groups appear on thescreen. In this dialog all alarm groups with active alarms areindicated by a red dot.
1 Select an alarm group by pushing its button .
2 To go between alarm group view and group view push theAlarm Display/Group Display button (at the bottom)repeatedly.
- The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.
Alarm history display
The alarm history display shows both active and alarms returnedto normal.
1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.
- The information is instantly updated as soon as somethinghappens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.
Counter display
The counter display shows counters and lap counters for suchcomponents as pumps, generators, engines, etc. included incounter system on DataChief C20.
Distributed Processing Unit display
The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows allmeasuring points connected to each DPU.
1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.
Deviation display
The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engineshaving deviation calculations in the DataChief C20.
1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.
Alarm and monitoring system
145AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Selected points display
The selected points display shows one of up to five groupscontaining customer selected tags. Each display can include up to20 tags.
Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may becascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop downmenu). However when you want to configure a new display allother windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected pointsdisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected points display is shown.
Make or alter tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected pointsdisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected points display is shown.
3 Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
5 Select tags and push Add.
- The selected points display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to twenty tags.
6 Push OK.
Selected trend display
The selected trends display shows one of up to five groupscontaining customer selected tags. Each display can include up toeight tags.
Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may becascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop downmenu). However when you want to configure a new display allother windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trenddisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected trend display is shown.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
146 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.
4 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.
5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.
Make or alter tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trenddisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected trend display is shown.
3 Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4 Select a system under Select.
5 Select tags and push Add.
- The selected trend display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to eight tags.
6 Push OK.
7 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.
8 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.
9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.
Selected bargraph display
The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraphdisplay pages containing customer selected tags. Each display caninclude up to twelve tags.
Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may becascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop downmenu). However when you want to configure a new display allother windows must be closed!
Display existing tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraphdisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected bargraph display is shown.
Make or alter tag selection
1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraphdisplay.
2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.
- The selected bargraph display is shown.
Alarm and monitoring system
147AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Push the Config button.
- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.
4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.
5 Select tags and push Add.
- The selected points display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to twelve tags.
6 Push OK.
Mimic diagrams
All mimic diagrams found in the Remote Operator Station areavailable through the ShipViewer. The number and design of thesemimic diagrams are ship dependent.
1 Push the Mimics button on menu bar.
2 Select mimic diagrams from the drop down list.
Figure 64 ShipViewer mimic selection.
3.8.4 How to print displayed information
Use the following procedure to print the information seen on thecolour graphics display.
1 Select the No background color” is in the Settings menu.
- This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.
Figure 65 ShipViewer Settings menu.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
148 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Push the print icon in the tool bar.
3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer imagesUse the following procedure to save the image seen on the colourgraphics display.
1 Push the save icon in the tool bar.
- A standard file save dialog is displayed.
2 Enter filename and a location and push Save.
- Use any program for handling pictures or bit maps to viewthe file.
Figure 66 ShipViewer Save dialog.
3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagramfiles
Use the following procedure to view previously saved image.
1 Push the open icon in the tool bar.
- A standard file open dialog is displayed.
2 Select filename and a location and push Open.
- The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft programfor viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.
Alarm and monitoring system
149AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 67 Typical open file window.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
150 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
4.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the process control system ofthe DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the“Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of thismanual. The following subjects are covered:
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Local Operator Station process control
4.2 About the process control systemThe following describes the DataChief C20 process controlsystem. It can control the following types of equipment:
• Pumps
• Fans
• Compressors
• Valves
It includes:
• PID controllers
Process control system
151AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.3 Remote Operator Station
4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter
Pump starter functions
To control pumps the following functions and features areavailable:
• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two differentdirections.
• Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
• Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
• Auto & manual control.
• Automatic timedelayedrestartwhenrecovering fromblackout.
• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or duringblackout.
• Automatic shut down.
• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowingthe system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Pump starter types
The following types of pumps can be operated:
• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
• Two speed: Two speed in the same direction.
• Two directional: One speed in two directions.
• All speed: Two speed in two directions.
• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Pump symbols
Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types ofpumps.
Figure 68 One way, one speed pump.
Figure 69 One way, two speed pump at low speed.
Figure 70 One way, two speed pump at high speed.
Figure 71 Two way, one speed pump going forward.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
152 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 72 Two way, one speed pump going in reverse.
Figure 73 Two way, two speed pump going forward at lowspeed.
Figure 74 Two way, two speed pump going forward at highspeed.
Figure 75 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at lowspeed.
Figure 76 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at highspeed.
Pump symbol colours
Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in:
Arrow outline colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour
For two-speed pumps only:
- Arrow fill green: Full speed
- Arrow outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
- Green: Running and remote
- Grey: Stopped and remote
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
- Yellow: Standby
Parameters
Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands.
Waitchangedirection:Wait timewhenchanging speeddirection.
Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands.
Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked fromauto restarting after a blackout.
Process control system
153AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stoppulse
Alarm and event enable
Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events areavailable. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due toclassification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms areamong these. The following conditions will result in alarms, andthe starter will be set to manual:
• Trip
• Start failure
• Stop failure
• Started without commanded
Modes
The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto andmanual.
- Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped.
- Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible.
Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. Thefunction is activated when the timer is set to a value larger thanzero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference.The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto andmanual modes.
Single acting control
A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay isclosed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened whenthe unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to oneway, one speed units only.
If the the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it itrunning, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. Inthis way, the event information sent from the starter includes thecurrent running information.
Blackout
Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) havethe local/remote switch connected serially with the power failureswitch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It isimportant that the starter detects the blackout before it is set tolocal, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receivesrecover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to off at therunning and remote feedback, and the delay to on for the systemblackout signal.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
154 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
System blackout
Actual blackout
Running feedback
Remote feedbackRecover
Figure 77 Blackout sequence as described above.
How to start one way one speed pumps
1 Select the mimic display showing the pump.
2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to start.
3 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
4 Push ACTIVATE/START
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running.
How to stop one way one speed pumps
1 Select the mimic display showing the pump.
2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to stop.
3 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
4 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL,.
How to operate two way and to speed pumps
1 Select the mimic display showing the pump.
2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to operate.
3 Push READ.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
- Dependent on the pump type one of the following windowsis displayed:
1
0
Process control system
155AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 78 Menu for two speed pump
Figure 79 Menu for two way pump
Figure 80 Menu for two speed, two way pump. Actualtext may differ.
To start and stop
4 Move the cursor over the Start or Stop button.
5 Push READ.
- The valve symbol changes colour to green for start, or greyfor stop.
To change speed or direction
6 Move the cursor over the corresponding option button.
7 Push READ.
8 Move the cursor over the Start button.
9 Push READ.
Note When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in thereverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable.
How to reset pumps
The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as theresult of a start failure.
1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm
2 Correct the problem.
3 Select the mimic display showing the pump.
ALARMACK
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
156 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want toreset.
5 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
6 Push RESET.
- The circle around the pump symbol changes from red togrey.
Standby pump systems
A standby system includes a pump symbol for each standby pump.The priority number defines which pump will start first - lowestnumber first. The running pump need not have the lowest number.When two pumps have the same standby number, both will startsimultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowestnumber will start at group start.
AUTO (1)
STANDBY (2)
AUTO
Pump symbol
Priority
Pressure indicator
Auto or manual modes
Figure 81 Symbol for standby pump system.
Standby system auto and manual modes
The standby system can be set to one of two modes:
- Auto: For normal standby system operation from theRemote Operator Station.
- Manual: The standby pump system is disabled. Pumps canbe manually operated.
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
RESET
AUTO
Process control system
157AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4 Push Auto/man.
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The textbackground changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual
How to start a standby pump system
To operate a pump system i standby mode the pump controller andeach of the pumps must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps mustbe started.
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The text background turns green and the text changes toAuto.
5 Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system.
6 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
7 Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to auto.
8 When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over thepump you want to start.
9 Push ACTIVATE/START
- The pump symbol turns green.
- The pump status changes to Running, auto.
How to stop a standby pump system
To takeapump systemoutof standby mode set the pump controllerto manual and stop the running pump if required.
AUTOMAN
MANUAL
AUTOMAN
AUTO
AUTOMAN
1
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
158 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The standby pump controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The text background turns grey.
- The controller is set to manual.
5 If you want to stop the running pump, move the cursor overit.
6 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
7 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,manual.
How to take a pump out of the standby system
To take a pump out of the standby system set the pumps to manual.
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
2 Move the cursor over the pump.
3 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to manual.
5 If you need to stop the pump, push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The pump symbol turns grey.
- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,manual.
AUTO
AUTOMAN
MANUAL
0
AUTOMAN
0
Process control system
159AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to put a pump back into the standby system
To put a pump into the standby system set the pumps to auto.
1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.
2 Move the cursor over the pump.
3 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The pump status changes to auto.
How to handle a failure to a running pump
When a pump fails it is detected through a drop in pressure.
- The pressure indicator turns yellow indicating a drop inpressure.
- The 1.st standby pump starts.
- The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running orstop dependent on how the system is configured.
1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.
2 Correct the problem.
How to set standby priority
A standby pump system will normally consist of two or threepumps.
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master.
2 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
3 Push Master.
- The text changes to standby (1).
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as firststandby.
2 Push READ.
- The pump is selected. The circle around the pump startsflashing.
AUTOMAN
ALARMACK
MASTER
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
160 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
3 Push 1.st standby.
- The text changes to standby (2).
1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as nextstandby.
2 Push READ.
- The pump is selected.
- The circle around the pump starts flashing.
3 Push Next standby.
- The text changes to standby (3).
4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter
Fan starter functions
To control fans the following functions and features are available:
• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two differentdirections.
• Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
• Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
• Auto & manual control.
• Automatic timedelayedrestartwhenrecovering fromblackout.
• Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout.
• Automatic shut down.
• Optional time stamp on every change ofoperation, allowing thesystem to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Fan starter types
The following types of starters can be operated:
• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.
• Two speed: Two speed in one direction.
• Two directional: One speed in two directions.
• All speed: Two speed in two directions.
• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.
Fan symbols
Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.
1.STSTAND
BY
NEXTSTAND
BY
Process control system
161AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 82 One way, one speed fan.
Figure 83 One way, two speed fan at low speed.
Figure 84 One way, two speed fan at high speed.
Figure 85 Two way, one speed fan going forward.
Figure 86 Two way, one speed fan going in reverse.
Figure 87 Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed.
Figure 88 Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed.
Figure 89 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at lowspeed.
Figure 90 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at highspeed.
Fan symbol colours
Arrow outline colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Arrow fill colour
For two-speed fans only!
- Shape filled green: Full speed
- Shape outline green: Low speed
Circle colour
- Green: Running and remote
- Grey: Stopped and remote
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
- Yellow: Standby
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
162 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to start a fan1 Select the mimic display showing the fan.
2 Move the cursor over the fan.
3 Push READ.
- The fan is selected.- The circle around the fan starts flashing.
4 Push ACTIVATE/START
- The fan symbol turns green.
How to stop a fan1 Select the mimic display showing the fan.
2 Move the cursor over the fan.
3 Push READ.
- The fan is selected.- The circle around the fan starts flashing.
4 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The fan symbol turns grey.
How to reset a fanThe fan logic must be reset when a fan has tripped or as the resultof a start failure.
1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.
2 Correct the problem, if any.
3 Select the mimic display showing the fan.
4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the fan you want to reset.
5 Push READ.
- The fan is selected. The circle around the fan starts flashing.
6 Push RESET.
- The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.
4.3.3 How to operate a compressorThe main purpose of the compressor starter is to control thecompressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starterprovidesautomatic start on lowpressureand stop on high pressure.The compressed air system may include one or more compressorswith analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure describes acompressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.
1
0
ALARMACK
RESET
Process control system
163AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
LEADER
FOLLOVER AIR RESERVOIR
P
Figure 91 A 2-compressor system with common pressuresensor.
The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals.Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limitand stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled:
Compressor starter functions
To control compressor the following functions and features areavailable:
• Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.
• Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.
• Auto & manual control.
• Automatic timedelayedrestartwhenrecovering fromblackout.
• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or duringblackout.
• Automatic shut down.
• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowingthe system to record time of starting, running and stopping.
Compressor control types
• Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure.
• Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures.
• Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with builtin hysteresis.
• Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressureswitches for start and stop.
Compressor symbols
Compressors have the following symbol.
Figure 92 Compressor symbol.
Compressor symbol colours
Compressor symbols have colours according to the state they arein.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
164 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Arrow colour
- Green: Running
- Grey: Stopped
Circle colour
- Green: Running and remote
- Grey: Stopped and remote
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
- Yellow: Standby
Leader follower compressor system
A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for eachcompressor. The symbol is described above.
LEADER
FOLLOVER
AUTO
Compressor symbol
Auto or manual modes
Figure 93 Leader follower compressor system.
Priorities
For automatic operation, the compressor starter must be set to automode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stoppriorities as follows:
• Leader
• 1.st follower
• 2.nd follower
• 3.rd follower
A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The prioritydefines in which order thecompressorswill start and stop.Thestartsetting for the 1.st follower must be lower or equal to the leaderstart setting and the stop setting for the first follower must be loweror equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped whenthe leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analoguepressure sensors all followers are stopped when reaching thealarmhigh high limit.
Process control system
165AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Pressure tags
Command timeout: The time the starter will wait beforesignalling command timeout.
Pressure filter:The length of time thepressuremay stay belowthestart limit before the compressor is started.
Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a newcompressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above thestart limit when this timer has expired.
Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked fromauto restarting after a blackout.
Start/stop conditions
Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters.
Start
Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors haveseparate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are:
• Pressure lower than the start limit.
• When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started ifthe pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a settime has expired.
Stop
The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual.When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority hasseparate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used,separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for eachpriority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities arestopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are:
• Pressure higher than the stop limit.
• Stop leader signal is active.
• High-high pressure.
Auto
Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set thecompressor automation functionality in operation. Auto modeoperation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any waydisabled from operating.
The following gives different examples for start and stopcondition:
Leader control
The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
166 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Stop leader
pressure
timeStart leader
Figure 94 Leader start stop limits.
Start follower on pressure drop
Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor setto a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its startsetting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.
Stop leaderpressure
time
Start leader & first follower
Start leader
Stop first follower & leader
Stop first follower
Start first follower
Figure 95 Start 1.st follower on pressure setting.
pressure
time
Start leader & two followers
Start leader
Stop compressors
Start first follower
Start second follower
Common stop setting
Figure 96 Start two followers on pressure setting.
Start follower after a time delay
The 1.st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a timedelay aftera start condition for the leadercompressor.The2.nd and3.rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed starton the start conditions for the topping up compressor.
pressure
time
Start leader
start leader
Start follower on timer
start delay = T4
Figure 97 Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram.
Process control system
167AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a timedelay. The timer is started when the 2.nd follower meets its startconditions. If the pressure falls below third followers startconditionsbefore the timerhasexpired, the third follower will startimmediately.
Stop leaderpressure
time
Start leader & two followers
Start leader
Stop followers & leader
Stop first follower
Start first followerStart second follower
Stop second follower
Start third follower
Stop second follower
Start third follower
Start delay
Figure 98 Start followers after a time delay.
The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when theleader has start conditions. If the first and second compressor doesnot start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3times; start delay after the leader had its start condition.
Stop leaderpressure
time
Start leader & two followers
Start leader
Stop first follower
Start first follower
Start second follower
Stop second follower
Start third follower
Stop third follower
Start first follower
dT = Start delay
stop
dT
Start timer third follower = 3dT
2dT
Start third follower
Figure 99 Follower start timers.
In the illustration below, the followers are started after timedelays.The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If thefirst follower meets it own start condition (before the delay hasexpired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, andcount the time from this event.
pressure
time
Start leader
Start leader
Common stop setting
Start first follower
Start second follower
Start third follower
Start first
dT = Start delay
stop
dT
Start third timer = 3dT (interrupted)
Start third timer = 2dT
Start 2.nd = dT
Start second Start third
Start 2.nd timer = 2dT (int.)
Figure 100 Interrupted start timer
Built in hysteresis
This function operates using two pressure switches:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
168 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch.
• Thefollowerwill start and stop in correspondencewith thestateof the low pressure switch.
high
pressure
time
low
start stop stop stopstart startleader follower follower follower leader
Figure 101 Built in hysteresis.
By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the twocompressors will function as a pair where one starts before theother.
Two analogue pressures
In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one thepressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressorsare stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above thestop limit.
pressure
Start leader
start leader
stop leader
Start leaderStop leader
A
B
Figure 102 Two analogue pressures
Overhaul function
Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when oneof the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start andstop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul:
• Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan.Thesensor isnot included when checking the auto start and stoplimits for the compressors.
• Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipmentto “out of service”. Different configurations are available asrequired by the customer.
Process control system
169AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to set auto and manual modes
A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of twomodes:
- Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from theRemote Operator Station.
- Manual: The leader follower system can only be operatedlocally from the starter cabinet.
1 Select the mimic display showing the leader followercompressor system.
2 Move the cursor over the leader follower compressorauto/manual square where you want to change mode.
3 Push READ.
- The compressor controller is selected. The text backgroundstarts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The controller changes between auto and manual. The textbackground changes between green and grey.
* Green - auto
* Grey - manual
How to start a leader follower compressor system
To operate a leader follower compressor system in standby modethe compressor controller and each of the compressors must be setto auto. Then one of the compressors must be started.
Note When thepressure ishigher than thestop limit, the compressorwillnot start.
1 Select the mimic display showing the leader followercompressor system.
2 Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol.
3 Push READ.
- The controller is selected.
- The text background starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man
- The text background turns green and the text changes toauto.
AUTO
AUTOMAN
MANUAL
AUTOMAN
AUTO
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
170 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leaderfollower system..
6 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
7 Push Auto/man.
- The compressor status changes to auto.8 Do this for each of the compressors.
9 When all compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to thecompressor you want to start.
10 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
11 Push ACTIVATE/START to to start the compressor.
12 Push Auto/man.
- The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL., auto.
How to stop a leader follower compressor system
To take a leader follower pump system out of standby mode, set thecompressor controller to manual and stop the running compressorif required.
1 Select the mimic display showing the leader followercompressor system.
2 Move the cursor over the controller symbol
3 Push READ.
- The controller is selected.- The text background starts flashing.
4 Push Auto/man.
- The controller is set to manual.5 If you want to stop the running compressor, move the cursor
over it.
6 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
AUTOMAN
1
AUTO
AUTOMAN
MANUAL
Process control system
171AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP
- The compressor symbol turns grey.
- The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remoteCTRL., manual.
How to set leader follower priority
A standby compressor system will normally consist of two or threecompressors.
1 Select the mimic display showing the leader followercompressor system.
2 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set asleader.
3 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
4 Push Master.
- The text changes to leader.
5 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as thefirst follower.
6 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
7 Push 1.st standby.
- The text changes to follower.
1 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as thesecond follower.
2 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
3 Push Next standby.
- The text changes to follower (2).
How to reset compressors
The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor hastripped or as the result of a start failure.
0
MASTER
1.STSTAND
BY
NEXTSTAND
BY
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
172 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Push Alarm ack to acknowledge the alarm.
2 Correct the problem.
3 Select the mimic display showing the compressor .
4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you wantto reset.
5 Push READ.
- The compressor is selected.
- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.
6 Push RESET.
- The circle around the compressor symbol changes from redto grey.
4.3.4 How to open or close valves
Valve control functions
The following functions and features are available:
• Monitoring of the controlled valve
• Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback
• Blocking from opening
• Blocking from closing
• Blocking from operation (local control)
• Deviation monitoring
• Update alarm status
• Update event status
• Optional time stamp on every change ofoperation, allowing thesystem to record time of positioning
Valve control types
The valve control can operate the following types ofconfigurations:
On-off valves
• Single acting: One relay for control.
• Singleacting withone feedback:Onerelay forcontrol and onebinary feedback.
• Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control andtwo binary feedbacks.
ALARMACK
RESET
Process control system
173AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only singleacting control.
• Double acting: Two relays for control.
• Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control andone binary feedback.
• Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control andtwo binary feedbacks.
• Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only doubleacting control.
Analogue positioning valves• Analogue out: Step-less positioning.
• Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control withanalogue feedback.
• Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning.
• Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioningwith analogue valve feedback.
• Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binaryfeedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valvefeedback and two binary end feedbacks.
MonitoringMonitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced tothe positioner, and no relay or other control is provided.
• One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks.
• Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks.
Valve symbolsDifferent valve symbols are used to indicate different types ofvalves.
Figure 103 Valve symbol.
Figure 104 Three way valve symbol.
Valve symbol coloursValve symbols have colours according to the state they are in.
Single and double acting valves- Green: Open- Grey: Closed- Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing)- Blue: Blocked- Red: Alarm- White: Local - not ready
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
174 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Throttle valves
- Green: Feedback at setpoint
- Grey: Closed/stopped
- Yellow: Feedback outside deadband
- Blue: Blocked
- Red: Alarm
- White: Local - not ready
Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %.
Note As a default, valves will give an alarm on timeout - when notreaching the end position.
How to open on-off valves
1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want tooperate.
3 Push READ.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
- Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve isdisplayed at the bottom left of the display.
4 Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The current status and the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to green.
How to close on-off valves
1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want tooperate.
3 Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the currentstateof thevalve isdisplayed at thebottom left of thedisplay.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
4 Push DEACTIVATE/ STOP.
- The current status and new the new command is displayed.
- The symbol colour changes to grey.
How to operate analogue valves
1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
1
0
Process control system
175AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want tooperate.
3 Push READ.
- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.- The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed.
* 0% - Closed* 100% - Open
4 Type in the new setpoint.
5 Push Enter.
- The valve setpoint is changed.
How to operate throttle valves
1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want tooperate.
3 Push READ.
- The equipment is selected.- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.- The following window is displayed:
Figure 105 Menu for analogue valves.
Open valve to 100%
4 To open the valve to 100% use the trackball to point to theopen button and push Read.
- The status changes, first to opening then to opened.
Close valve to 0%
5 To close the valve to 0% use the trackball to point to theclosebutton and push Read.
- The status changes, first to closing then to closed.
Throttle mode
6 To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100% use thetrackball to point to the Throttle mode check box and pushRead.
- The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
176 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 106 Menu for analogue valves in throttle mode.
7 Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease button.
8 Push READ.
9 Type in the new setpoint value.
10 Push ENTER.
- The setpoint changes.
How to reset valves
Resetting of valves is required on timeout.
1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.
2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want toreset.
3 Push READ.
- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the currentstatus of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of thedisplay.
- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.
4 Push RESET.
- The symbol colour changes to grey.
4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller
PID controller symbol
The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value.The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressurecontrolled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.
RESET
Process control system
177AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Process
Processsetpoint
Process feedback
Valve feedback
Figure 107 PID controller.
The controller can operate in two modes:
* Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. Thecontroller operates when active.
* Deactive (off). The PID controller does not control theprocess. If the controller operates on an actuator, manualvalve positioning is possible.
FW COOLING100
0
ACTIVE
62TEMP.
Status
60Setp.
Deg. C Deg. C
28Setp.
32FB
Actuator 0 100%
Alarm statusindicator
PID controllersetpoint
Actuator
Actuator setpoint, used usedwhen control is deactive
Actuator feedback
Actual value
Indicator green when active,grey when deactive
Processsetpoint
Processfeedback
Figure 108 PID controller symbol.
PID controller symbol colours
- Green: Active- Blue: Blocked or configuration fail- Grey: Deactive- Red: Alarm
To select a PID controller
1 Select the mimic display showing the PID controller.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
178 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate.
3 Push READ.
- The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square isdisplayed around the controller.
- Tag, tag description and the current state of the PIDcontroller is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
ME HFO TEMP200
0
ACTIVE
123TEMP.
Status
120Setp.
Deg. C Deg. C
67Setp.
67Feedb.
Actuator 0 100%
Figure 109 Symbol for an active PID controller.
To activate the controller
1 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate and push READ.
2 Push ACTIVATE/START.
- The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint isshown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both asa percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent tothe controller.
3 To enter a new setpoint push READ.
- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or EnterNew PROCESS setpointis displayed.
4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controlleradjusts theactuator tomake theprocess feedbackequal to thenew setpoint.
To deactivate the controller
1 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate and push READ.
1
Process control system
179AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.
- The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is nolonger displayed, but showing N/A in the Setp. field.Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and abargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.
3 To enter a new actuator setpoint push READ.
- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or EnterNew PROCESS setpointis displayed.
4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.
5 Push ENTER.
- The new actuator setpoint is displayed.
Note You must manually adjust the actuator to make the processfeedback equal to the required value.
ME HFO TEMP200
0
ACTIVE
123TEMP.
Status
N/ASetp.
Deg. C Deg. C
67Setp.
67Feedb.
Actuator 0 100%
Figure 110 Symbol for a PID controller that is not active.
0
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
180 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.4 Local Operator Station
4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fansfrom the Local Operator Station
To operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station do thefollowing:
1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected tothe same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the pump orfan.
2 When connected push MENU UP.
- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’sconnected to the CAN segment.
3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toselect the DPU controlling the pump or fan. The selectedDPU must be displayed in line two.
4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.
- Observe the DPU Top Menu.
5 Push MENU DOWN to select the Tag Overview Menu.
- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for pumps and fans are organised asfollows:
DPU module Function tag channelsfor starters, valves etc.
RAi-16 33 - 47
RAi-32 33 - 47
RIO-C1 33 - 47
RIO-C2 33 - 47
dPSC 1 - 99
6 Select the function tag channel for the pump or fan you wantto operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWNbuttons.
7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between TagDescription and Tag Name.
Process control system
181AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Tagname
Tagstatus
33 AM132S Ready for Start
Channelnumber
8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Starter display.
- Observe the Tag Details Starter display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for thistag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control pumps or fans the system requires apassword.
9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.
10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select thePassword parameter.
11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).
12 Push ENTER.
13 If not already selected, push F4 to select the ApplicationMenu.
14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the Commands for Starter Menu.
- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see allavailable commands.
- The first set of commands are:
* F1 Start LF (low forward, normal start)
* F2 Start HF (high forward)
* F3 Start LR (low reverse)
* F4 Start HR (high reverse)
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
182 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24Start commands : 2 / 12033 AM132S Ready for start|Start LF |Start HF |Start LR |Start HR
Figure 111 Typical control display starter, first set.
- The second set of commands are:
* F1 Stop
* F2 Reset
* F3 Auto
* F4 Semi Auto
Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24Stop & aux commands : 2 / 12033 AM132S Ready for start|Stop |Reset |Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 112 Typical control display starter, second set.
- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:
* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active
16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next andprevious function tag at the same operational level.
17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the TagOverview display.
18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.
- The DPU list is displayed.
Process control system
183AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
4.4.2 How to operate valves from theLocal Operator Station
To operate valves from the Local Operator Station do thefollowing:
1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected tothe same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the valve.
2 When connected push MENU UP.
- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’sconnected to the CAN segment.
3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toselect the DPU controlling the valve. The selected DPU mustbe displayed in line two.
4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.
- Observe the DPU Top Menu.
5 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Overview Menu.
- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.
- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.
- Function tag channels for valves are organised as follows:
DPU module Function tag channelsfor starters, valves etc.
RAi-16 33 - 47
RAi-32 33 - 47
RIO-C1 33 - 47
RIO-C2 33 - 47
dPSC 1 - 99
6 Select the function tag channel for the valve you want tooperate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWNbuttons.
Tagname
Tagstatus
36 NM 13P Closed AUTO
Channelnumber
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
184 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between TagDescription and Tag Name.
8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Positionerdisplay.
- Observe the Tag Details Positioner display.
- In this display you can change database parameters for thistag. (Described elsewhere).
- To be able to control valves the system requires a password.
9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.
10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select thePassword parameter.
11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).
12 Push ENTER.
13 If not already selected push F4 to select the ApplicationMenu.
14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.
- Observe the commands for the Positioner Menu.
- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.
15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see allavailable commands.
- The first set of commands are:
* F1 Open
* F2 Close
* F3 Reset
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27Adjust Setpoint 0.036 NM 64P Closed Auto|Open |Close |Reset |
Figure 113 Typical control display for positioner, first set.
- The second set of commands are:
* F1 Thr.Open (throttle open)
Process control system
185AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* F2 Thr.Close (throttle close)
* F3 Auto
* F4 Semi Auto
Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27Not used for analog: 2 / 120 R36 NM 64P Closed Auto|Thr.Open |Thr.Close| Auto |Semi Auto
Figure 114 Typical control display for positioner, second set.
- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:
* Fixed light - function active
* Flashing - function activating
* Dark - not active.
16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next andprevious valve function tag at the same operational level.
17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the TagOverview display.
18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.
- The DPU list is displayed.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
186 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the power managementsystem of the DataChiefC20. It is intended for personnel familiarwith the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sectionsof this manual. The following subjects are covered:
- About the power management system
- Remote Operator Station process control
- Midi Operator Station process control
Power management system
187AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5.2 About the power management system
Changeover functionality
Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have changeover functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standbydiesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will thenunload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected thediesel may continue running, cool down and stop or stop directly,dependent on the configuration.
Automatic start and connect on blackout
When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1.st. standby dieselgenerator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, thenext standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possibleto configure the system to start more than one standby generatoron blackout.
Load dependent start and stop of standbygenerators
When a high load occurs on on the connected generator(s), the 1.ststandby generator will start and connect. When the load decreasesenough to let a generator disconnect without overloading theremaining, the 1.st to stop generator will disconnect and stop.
Control of heavy consumers start request andstart granted
When a heavy consumer start request is received, the powermanagement system will check for available power.
* If enough power is available and a predefined number ofgenerators are connected, the power management systemgives a “start granted” to the consumer.
* If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s)will automatically start and connect. When enough poweris available, a “start granted” is given to the consumer.
* When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request forstart”, only one is granted at a time. The powermanagement system remembers all start requests andenables them in sequence.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
188 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5.3 Remote Operator Station
5.3.1 OverviewThe power management system is mainly operated through amimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. Thesystem can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls havedifferent configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.A typical mimic picture is shown below:
Figure 115 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.3.2 How to operate a generator setwith start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seenbelow) is called a generator set. The following information iscontained in the colours used for the generator set.
Power management system
189AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Prime mover symbolRed dot: Prime mover alarmGray: StoppedGrey and yellow: StartingGreen: Running
Green and yellow: Stopping
Generator symbolRed dot: Generator alarmGray: Stopped
Green: Running, ready to connect
Circuit braker symbolRed dot: Circuit breaker alarmIn disconnected position:Gray: OpenYellow: Syncronizing/connectingIn connected position:Green: ConnectedYellow: Disconnecting
Generator set information box
Each generator set has an information box containing thefollowing information:
Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto.Operational state of the generator set.Standby status information, priority in brackets.Low load auto stop blocked.Fuel selection/load control selection.
Figure 116 Generator set information box.
To display the control dialog
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set. This dialog will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured. The following is a maximumconfiguration:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
190 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.Push to stop the generator.
Push to turn off load dependent stop function.
Push to set the generator to semi-auto mode.
Push to give the generator lower priority.
Push to select diesel oil only.
Push to start the generator.
Push to turn on load dependent stop function.
Push to give the generator higher priority.
Push to set the generator to auto mode.
Push to select frequency and load control by governor.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Push to select heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic.
Push to select frequency and load control by DataChie
Figure 117 Control dialog for generator set with start/stop.
Semi Auto mode
In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using thebuttons in the dialog to start or stop, connect or disconnect itaccording to the load condition.
Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:
* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator butthe diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
To start a generator
1 Push Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominalspeed.
1 Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
Power management system
191AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To disconnect a generator1 Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
To stop a generatorThis is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
1 Push Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push Stop twice.
Auto modeIn auto mode the generator is automatically started and stoppedaccording to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note For Auto mode the following applies:
* A disconnect command will cause the followingsequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and readyfor start.
1 Push Connect.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
192 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To disconnect a generator
1 Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push Stop twice.
To stop a generator
When the circuit breaker is connected:
1 Push Stop.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop withoutcooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:
1 Push Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
To start a generator
1 Push Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.
Power management system
193AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Stop block On/Off
1 Push On to block the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is alow load on the main switchboard.
2 Push Off to activate the load dependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a lowload on the main switchboard.
Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stoplast. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last andstop first.
1 Push Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standbypriority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one.
2 Push Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standbypriority.The indicated standby number is increased by one.
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil
1 Push HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop theprime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fueloil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
1 Push DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
1 Push Droop to select frequency and load control by theDataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governordroop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
1 Push Isochron to select frequency and load control by thediesel engine speed governor.
Reset
1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.3.3 How to operate a generator setwithout start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
194 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To display the control dialog
1 Select the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons areused for:
Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Figure 118 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- When the shaft generator is syncronizing, the dieselgenerators connected to the bus bar will regulate thefrequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generatorsconnected to the same bus bar will increase their power totake the load off the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.3.4 How to operate a generator setwithout start, stop with adjustableload setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.
Power management system
195AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To display the control dialog
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons areused for:
Push to connect the generator.
Push to disconnect the generator.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Push to activate the new load setpoint value.
Insert the load setpoint value here.
Figure 119 Control dialog for generator set without start/stopwith adjustable load setpoint.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Load setp. - load setpoint
1 Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box.
2 Push the READ button to select it.
3 Type in the new load setpoint.
4 Push OK.
- The generator will change the load according to the newsetpoint.
Reset
1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
196 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5.3.5 How to operate the mainswitchboard controller
Main switchboard controller symbols
The main switchboard is available with two different layoutsdependent on the system configuration. The following informationis provided:
Amount of power generated.
Status: Local/semi-auto/auto.Low load autostop blocked.
Voltage of generated power.Frequency of generated power.
Operational state, red text indicatesan alarm condition.
Symmetric/asymmetric loadsharing mode.
Available (spare) power.
Figure 120 Main switchboard controller alternative 1.
Available (spare) power.Operational state, red text indicates analarm condition.
Figure 121 Main switchboard controller alternative 2.
To display the control dialog
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the main switchboard.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the themain switchboard.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons areused for:
Power management system
197AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Push to select asymmetric load sharing.Push to set the main switchboard controller to semi-auto mode.
Push to reset alarm messages.
Push to set the main switchboard controller to automode.
Push to select symmetric load sharing.
Figure 122 Control dialog for the main switchboard.
Auto
1 Push Auto to set the main switchboard controller in automode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are inoperation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest prioritystarts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with thehighest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normaloperation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1 Push SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller inSemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentionedunder Auto above.
Sym - Symmetric
1 Push Sym for symmetric load sharing between thegenerators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asym - Asymmetric
1 Push Asym for asymmetric load sharing between twoconnected generators. When more than two generators areconnected the asymmetric load sharing is switched ofautomatically and will use symmetric load sharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of20%.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
198 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limitof about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators willswap load setpoints.
Reset
1 Push to reset the main switchboard controller when in stateOperation Blocked, Remote Control.
5.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker
To display the control dialog
The control dialog is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor to the bus tie breaker.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the thebus tie breaker is displayed.
Connect
1 Push Connect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect
1 Push Disconnect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is open.
Reset
1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.3.7 How to operate the one touch autosequence
One touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboardto a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button.
One touch auto sequence controller symbol
To simplify power management one touch auto sequencing allowsyou to set the main switchboard to a set of predefinedconfigurations by pushing a button. Typical main switchboardconfigurations are:
Power management system
199AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* DG-mode (diesel generator mode)
* Manoeuvre mode
* PTO-mode (shaft generator mode)
* PTI-mode (electric propulsion mode)
Figure 123 One touch auto sequence symbol, indicatingcurrent state of operation.
To display the control dialog
The control dialog is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Move the cursor over the one touch auto sequence symbol.
3 Push the READ button.
- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the theone touch auto sequence.
- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons areused for:
Push to abort theselected sequence.
Push a modebutton to activate it.
Push to reset.
Figure 124 One touch auto sequence dialog box.
To select modes
1 Push the button for the desired mode.
- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to setthe main switchboard to this mode.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
200 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5.4 Midi Operator Station
5.4.1 OverviewThe power management system is mainly operated through amimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. Thesystem can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls havedifferent configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.A typical mimic picture is shown below.
Figure 125 Typical power management system mimic picture.
5.4.2 How to operate the mainswitchboard controller
To display the control picture
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to select one of theswitchboards.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the switchboard and text for thefunction keys appear.
ENTER
Power management system
201AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 126 Typical main switchboard controller.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how theswitchboard is configured.
5 Push the function key for the desired function.
- The following functions are available:* Symmetric* Asymmetric* Connect more power* Disconnect surplus power* Stop block on* Stop block off* Reset* Auto* Semi-auto
Symmetric
1 Push the function key for Symmetric for symmetric loadsharing between the generators.
- The load is shared equally between the generators.
Asymmetric
1 Push the function key for Asymmetric for asymmetric loadsharing between two connected generators. When more thantwo generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing isswitched of automatically and will use symmetric loadsharing.
- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
202 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of20%.
* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limitof about 80%.
* After an adjustable period of time the two generators willswap load setpoints.
Reset
1 Push the function key for to reset the main switchboardcontroller when in state Operation Blocked, RemoteControl.
Auto
1 Push the function key for Auto to set the main switchboardcontroller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recoveryfunctions are in operation.
- When the load increases above an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the highest priority starts.
- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the lowest priority number stops.
- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest prioritystarts.
- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with thehighest priority starts. A changeover takes place.
SemiAuto
Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normaloperation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.
1 Push the function key for SemiAuto to set the mainswitchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This willdeactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.
5.4.3 How to operate a generator setwith start/stop control
Generator set symbol colour interpretation
A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seenbelow) is called a generator set. The following information iscontained in the colours used for the generator set.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Power management system
203AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Prime mover symbolRed dot: Prime mover alarmGray: StoppedGrey and yellow: StartingGreen: Running
Green and yellow: Stopping
Generator symbolRed dot: Generator alarmGray: Stopped
Green: Running, ready to connect
Circuit braker symbolRed dot: Circuit breaker alarmIn disconnected position:Gray: OpenYellow: Syncronizing/connectingIn connected position:Green: ConnectedYellow: Disconnecting
To display the control picture
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator setyou want to control.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for thefunction keys appear.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured.
5 Push the function key for the desired function.
- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset
* Start
* Stop
* Auto
* Semi-auto
ENTER
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
204 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* Stop block on
* Stop block off
* Pri. higher
* Pri. lower
* Switch genset
Figure 127 Generator set with start stop control.
To display detailed information
The following detailed information displays are available:
* Generator frequency
* Generator voltage
* Generator current
* Generator load
* Generator relative load
1 Select a generator set as described above.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the informationyou want to display.
Figure 128 Use the navigator to go between these selections.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the detail display is shown. Thefollowing is a detail display for frequency.
ENTER
Power management system
205AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 129 Frequency display.
4 Push Enter again to display a tag details view for this tag.
- A new picture showing the tag details view is shown. Thefollowing is a tag details view for a frequency tag.
Figure 130 Tag details view for a frequency tag.
5 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable information.
Semi Auto mode
In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using thefunction keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according tothe load condition.
Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:
* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.
* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator butthe diesel will remain running.
* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
206 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To start a generator
1 Push the function key for Start.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominalspeed.
1 Push the function key for Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
To disconnect a generator
1 Push the function key for Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
To stop a generator
This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
1 Push the function key for Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Power management system
207AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push the function key for Stop twice.
Auto mode
In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stoppedaccording to the load condition and the priority setting.
Note For Auto mode the following applies:
* A disconnect command will cause the followingsequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.
* A stop command will cause the following sequence:Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.
* A connect command will cause the following sequence:Starting, synchronizing and connect.
* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.
To connect a generator
This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and readyfor start.
1 Push the function key for Connect.
- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.
- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.
- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
To disconnect a generator
1 Push the function key for Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
208 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push Stop twice.
To stop a generatorWhen the circuit breaker is connected:
1 Push the function key for Stop.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop withoutcooling down period.
When the circuit breaker is disconnected:
1 Push the function key for Stop.
- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.
- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.
2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.
To start a generator
1 Push the function key for Start.- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means
it is starting.- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that
it is running idle.- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is
running nominal and ready to connect.
Stop block On/Off
1 Push the function key for Stop block on to block the loaddependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will not stop when there is alow load on the main switchboard.
2 Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the loaddependent stop function.
- This means that the generator will stop when there is a lowload on the main switchboard.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Power management system
209AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Pri. Higher/Lower
The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stoplast. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last andstop first.
1 Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generatorset a higher standby priority. The indicated standby numberis lowered by one.
2 Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generatorset a lower standby priority. The indicated standby numberis increased by one.
HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil
1 Push the function key for HFO to activate the heavy fuel oilchange over logic.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop theprime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fueloil during loaded condition.
DO - Diesel Oil
1 Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover ondiesel oil only.
- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.
Droop
1 Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and loadcontrol by the DataChiefC20, based on diesel engine speedgovernor droop curve (static).
Isochron - Isochroneous
1 Push the function key for Isochron to select frequency andload control by the diesel engine speed governor.
Reset
1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.4.4 How to operate a generator setwithout start/stop control
Applicable for shaft generators.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
210 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To display the control picture
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator setyou want to control.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for thefunction keys appear.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured.
5 Push the function key for the desired function.
- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Reset
Figure 131 Generator set without start/stop.
Connect
1 Push the function key for Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the dieselgenerators connected to the bus bar will regulate thefrequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
ENTER
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
Power management system
211AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Disconnect
1 Push the function key for Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generatorsconnected to the same bus bar will increase their power totake the load off the shaft generator.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.4.5 How to operate a generator setwithout start, stop with adjustableload setpoint
Applicable for steam turbine generators.
To display the control picture
1 Select the power management mimic picture.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator setyou want to control.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing this generator set and text for thefunction keys appear.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.
- The number of functions will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured.
5 Push the function key for the desired function.
- The following functions are available:
* Connect
* Disconnect
* Load setp.
* Reset
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
ENTER
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
212 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Connect
1 Push the function key for Connect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.
Disconnect
1 Push the function key for Disconnect.
- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.
- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.
Reset
1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
5.4.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker
To display the control picture
The control picture is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.
1 Select the the power management mimic picture.
2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the bust tiebreaker you want to control.
3 Push Enter.
- A new picture showing the bus tie breaker is shown.
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
ENTER
Power management system
213AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 132 Typical bus tie breaker symbol.
4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.
5 Push the function key for the desired mode.
- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to setthe main switchboard to this mode.
Connect
1 Push the function key for Connect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is closed.
Disconnect
1 Push the function key for Disconnect.
- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is open.
Reset
1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.
- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
214 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 REFERENCE GUIDE
6.1 IntroductionThis document gives an overview of parameters that can beinspected and adjusted from a Local or Remote Operator Station.Where applicable other details of the parameters’ are included.
The following subjects are covered:
- Tage type overview
- Alarm and monitoring parameters
- Engineers safety
Reference guide
215AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6.2 Tag type overviewThe following is a list of available tag types in the DataChiefC20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagement.
A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on aDistributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signalconnected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defineswitch application to run on the signal.
Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module(RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4- 20 mA.
6.2.1 Basic tag typesTag type number Channel type
0 Undefined type
1 Voltage +-- 0.1
2 Voltage +-- 1
3 Voltage +-- 5
4 Voltage +-- 10
6 Voltage 0 -- 1
7 Voltage 0 -- 1
8 Voltage 0 -- 5
9 Voltage 0 -- 10
11 Milli amps +-- 1
12 Milli amps +-- 5
13 Milli amps +-- 10
14 Milli amps +-- 20
16 Milli amps 0 -- 1
17 Milli amps 0 -- 5
18 Milli amps 0 -- 10
19 Milli amps 0 -- 20
20 Milli amps 4 -- 20
22 PT 50
23 PT 100
24 PT 1000
26 Potmeter 1 K
27 Potmeter 5 K
29 On--off without check (RAi--16)
30 On--off single check (RAi--16)
31 On--off double check (RAi--16)
32 RDi--32 digital input
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
216 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Channel typeTag type number
34 Counter event
35 Counter frequency
36 Counter time
38 TC element
40 AC voltage 10 bit
41 AC current 10 bit
43 Generator frequency
44 Bus freq.
45 Phase difference
46 Cosine phi
47 Phase velocity
49 Pick up
128 Exhaust mean
129 Exhaust deviation
130 Rio PLC type
131 DO 401 client
132 DOT (dig. out) handler
133 AO (an. out) 401 client
134 AO (analogue out) handler
135 Exhaust deviation limit
136 Alarm relay
137 Local alarm system
138 LOS 401 client
141 Rotating light handler
142 ASCII IO handler
143 SSC IO handler
144 DS 401 handler
200 Serial AI
201 Serial DI
255 System tag handler
150 Dead man handler
Exhaust tag types are: 128, 129 and 135.
6.2.2 Analogue out tagsTag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines theanalogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unittype is Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogueoutput channel types are available:Channel type number Channel type
0 0 -- 10.0 Volt
1 +-- 10.0 Volt
Reference guide
217AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Channel typeChannel type number
2 0 -- 5.0 Volt
3 +-- 5.0 Volt
4 0 -- 20.0 mA
5 4 -- 20.0 mA
6.2.3 RelaysBinary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Outputmodule. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module areautomatically an output channel type.
6.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters
6.3.1 Analogue input tag itemsParameterName
Type Adjust--able
Function
Enable Grad.Alarm
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable aAlarm
Enable AlarmLow
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable AlarmLow Low
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable AlarmHigh
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable AlarmHigh High
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable EventLow
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Enable EventLow Low
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Enable EventHigh
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Enable EventHigh High
Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Gradient BlockLimit
Number Yes Block if measured value is< block limit
Gradient Limit Number Yes Gradient alarm limit
Limit Alarm LowLow
Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm HighHigh
Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Event LowLow
Number Yes Event limit
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
218 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust--able
TypeParameterName
Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event High Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event HighHigh
Number Yes Event limit
Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 milliseconds
Dynamic DeadBand
Number Yes Report value dead bandlimit
Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum value
Counts High Number Yes A/D maximum value
Eng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum value
Eng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximumvalue
Raw Value Number No Measured raw value di-rectly from ADC
Raw PercentValue
Number No Measured raw value n %of range
Scaled Value Number No Measured value scaled totechnical value
Filtered Value Number No Filtered scaled value
Some of the parameters are further explained below.
Enable alarms and events
Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of theenable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable.
Gradient parameters
The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In orderto make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculatedbased on a moving average over the three last samples of thefiltered value. When the process value falls below the Block limitthe gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, thegradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceedsthe Gradient Limit.
• Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits thegradient alarm.
• Gradient Limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradientvalue in [units/sec] exceeds this limit.
6.3.2 Alarm and event limitsAlarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm& event limit has it’s own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, thealarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set thecorresponding status is cleared.
Reference guide
219AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and fourevent limits. The alarm and event status is updated as follows (ifthe enable flag is set):
1 LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit.
2 L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit.
3 H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit.
4 HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit.
5 Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit.
6 Ev_2 = on, if Filtered_value > event_2 limit.
7 Ev_3 = on, if Filtered_value > event_3 limit.
8 Ev_4 = on, if Filtered_value > event_4 limit.
The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarmdelays has expired.
6.3.3 Filter time
The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaledprocess value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant,which defines thecut-off frequency for the filter.The timeconstantresolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter,hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constantset to 0.1 seconds.
6.3.4 Dynamic deadband
The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with thesame number of decimals as specified for the process value. Thedynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tagparameter is set to YES.This parameter is used for dynamicupdateof the process value for external tag users. When the process valuebecomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than thedynamic dead-band, a new value is sent.
6.3.5 Scaling parameters
The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs oftechnical values and measured values read from the analogue todigital converter.
The technical sensor range is: Eng.Units High – Eng.Units Low.
The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
220 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Counts High
Counts Low
EU HighEng.value
EU Low
ADCInput
Figure 133 Scaling parameters.
Measured values
Each channel is sampled froma16 bit analogue to digital converterevery 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in therange 0 – 65535 Counts. Depending on the type of signalconnected, the legal count range may be less. The table belowshows the count range for the different signal types available:Code Short Text Counts High Counts Low
1 VOLT_PM_01 45874 19660
2 VOLT_PM_1 45874 19660
3 VOLT_PM_5 45874 19660
4 VOLT_PM_10 58981 6553
6 VOLT_0_01 45874 32767
7 VOLT_0_1 45874 32767
8 VOLT_0_5 45874 32767
9 VOLT_0_10 58981 32767
11 MA_PM_1 58981 6553
12 MA_PM_5 39321 26214
13 MA_PM_10 45874 19660
14 MA_PM_20 58981 6553
16 MA_0_1 58981 32767
17 MA_0_5 39321 32767
18 MA_0_10 45874 32767
19 MA_0_20 58981 32767
20 MA_4_20 58981 38010
22 PT_50 1) 1)
23 PT_100 1) 1)
24 PT_1000 1) 1)
26 POT_1K 2) 2)
27 POT_5K 2) 2)
Reference guide
221AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 The RTD elements are automatically calculated based oninterpolation with values fetched from a predefined table.The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.
2 The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculatedbased on a conversion algorithm. The counts scalingparameters is therefore not adjustable.
The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of theanalogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters theScaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percentvalue is calculated ( ± 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as inputto the 2 nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.6 Counter input tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--
ableFunction
Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm
Enable Alarm LowLow
Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm
Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm
Enable Alarm HighHigh
Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm
Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent
Enable Event LowLow
Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent
Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent
Enable Event HighHigh
Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm
Limit Alarm Low Low Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Alarm HighHigh
Number Yes Alarm limit
Limit Event Low Low Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event High Number Yes Event limit
Limit Event HighHigh
Number Yes Event limit
Filter time Number Yes Time in 100 millisec-onds
Filter index Number Yes Counter input pin fil-ter
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
222 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust--able
TypeParameter Name
Time base Number Yes Counting time code:ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr=3
Pulses per Eng.Unit Number Yes Pulses per engi-neering unit.
Raw value Number No Measured raw valuedirectly from counter
Scaled value Number No Measured valuescaled to technicalvalue
Filtered value Number No Filtered scaledvalue
Dynamic dead band Number No
Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below.
Counter input parameters
Filter Index
When using the counter as an event counter it is possible to filterthecounter input signalwith adigital filter in orderto avoidcontactnoise to be counted. The Filter Index parameter specifies thedigital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.Filter Index Cut--off frequency
0 1 HZ
1 5 HZ
2 10 HZ
3 50 HZ
4 100 HZ
5 500 HZ
6 1667 HZ
Time Base
When using the counter for frequency or time measurements theTime base parameter specifies in which time unit themeasurement shall be calculated. The following values areavailable:Time Base Time unit
0 Milliseconds
1 Seconds
2 Minutes
3 Hours
Note Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequencymode.
Reference guide
223AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Pulses per Eng.Unit
When using the counter in frequency measurement mode thescaling algorithm need to know the number of pulses generated bythe counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified in thePulses pr. Eng Unit parameter.
Pulses per engineering unit is for instance:
• 10 pulses per liter (flow rate).
• 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM).
• 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed).
Counter input measured values
Raw Value
This value is read directly from the counter. In event countingmode this value is the same as the scaled value.
Scaled Value
In event counting mode the scaled value is the same as the rawvalue. In frequency, counting mode the scaled value is calculatedfrom the raw value by using the Pulses pr. Eng Unit and the timebase parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter isused to calculate the Scaled value.
Filtered Value
The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order butterworth filterto produce the Filtered Value.
6.3.7 Digital input tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--
ableFunction
On delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-onds
Off delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-onds
Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm
Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event
Invert Yes/no Yes Invert input status
Input value Number No Input status before timedelay
Delayed input Number No Input status after timedelay
Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
224 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Digital input parameters
DelaysDigital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevanttransitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal mustbe stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time isspecified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delayof 2 seconds.
InvertThe inputvaluecan beused directly or inverted beforeuse.SpecifyYES to invert the input signal.
Input ValuesInput status both before and after time delay is available.
6.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--
ableFunction
Mean temperaturehigh high
Number Yes Alarm limit
Enable alarm high Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-able
Enable alarm highhigh
Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-able
Mean temperaturehigh
Number Yes Alarm limit
Mean temperatureblock
Number Yes Alarm blocking limit
Dev. temperaturehigh
Number Yes Alarm limit
Dev. temperaturelow
Number Yes Alarm limit
Cylinder 1 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 2 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 3 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 4 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 5 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 6 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 7 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 8 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Reference guide
225AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
FunctionAdjust--able
TypeParameter Name
Cylinder 9 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 10 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 11 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 12 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 13 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 14 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 15 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Cylinder 16 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.
Dynamic alarm lim-it
Number No Deviation alarm limit
Mean Temp Number No Calculated meantemp
Exhaust mean value parameters
Mean Temp High High/Enable alarm High High
If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the meantemperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated meantemperature increases above the mean temperature High highlimit.
Mean Temp High
The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculatedmean temperature increases above the mean temperature highlimit.
Dynamic deviation alarm limit
Alarm limit at current mean temperature.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
226 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mean Temp block/Dev. Temp. high/Dev. Temp. Low
If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature blocklimit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Dev. Temp. low limitdefines the maximum allowed deviation from the meantemperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equalto the mean temperature block limit. The Dev. Temp high limitdefines the maximum allowed deviation from the meantemperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equalto the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviationalarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinderuses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives agraphical illustration of the different parameters.
100 200 300 400 500 600 _C
100
200
300
400
500
600
_C
dtL : Cylinder Exh. tempDeviation low limitat Mean temp lowlimit
mtH : Mean temp.high alarm limt
dtH : Cylinder Exh. tempDeviation highlimit at Mean temphigh limit
mtB : Mean temp. alarmblocking limtAlarms are Inhibited
in this area
Cylinder ExhaustTemperature
Engine MeanTemperature
AlarmZone
AlarmZone
Figure 134 Exhaust mean valueparameters.
Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature
The cylinder (1 – 16) temperature parameters are tag numberreferences for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Only thecylinder references that are in use areused forcalculating themeantemperature.
Reference guide
227AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mean temperature
The mean temperature is calculated as an average of all thecylinders specified in the cylinder temperature referenceparameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail arenot used in the calculation.
6.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag itemsParametername
Type Adjust--able
Function
Correction temp Number Yes Correction temp
Cylinder tem-perature ref.
Number Yes This temperature tag-number ref.
Normalizedtemp
Number No Measured temperature+ temperature correc-tion
There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder.This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature againstthe deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust meantemperature tag item and activates the exhaust deviation alarm ifthe normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range.
Exhaust deviation parameters
Correction temperature
Each cylinder’s correction temperature is calculated only onrequest from the operator. This is normally done when the engineis running in steady state at 100% load. The reason for using acorrection temperature is that all cylinders have their own normaloperating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the enginemean temperature. By Adding the correction temperature to thereal cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalisedso that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. Thecorrection temperature is calculated in the following way:
Correction_temperature = Meantemp -RealCylindertemp
Cylinder temperature reference
The cylinder temperature ref. parameter is a tag number referenceto the cylinders temperature.
Normalised Temp
The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way:Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp +Correction_temp
This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checkingagainst the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
228 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6.3.10 Common submenu itemsParameterName
Type Adjust--able
Function
Tag type Number Yes RIO channel type
Decimal point Number Yes Fixed point location for taganaloge value
External tag Yes/no No Yes if tag is used by someother tag
Tag name Text No Tag’s global name
Common submenu parameters
Tag type
The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal ishandled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available.
Decimal point
Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value.The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostlyhave decimal point 1.
Tag names
The External Tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used byanother module. Most control applications are externals. The tagsvalue will be automatically transmitted for external use. The TagName parameter is the global tag name. These parameters can notbe changed from a Local Operator Station.
6.3.11 Alarm submenu itemsParameterName
Type Adjust--able
Function
Alarm on delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay on (1second)
Alarm off delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay off (1second)
Alarm on delay2 Number Yes HighHigh/lowlow delayon (1 second)
Alarm off delay2 Number Yes Highhigh/lowlow delayoff (1 second)
Inhibit on delay Number Yes Inhibit delay on (1 sec-ond)
Inhibit off delay Number Yes Inhibit delay off (1 sec-ond)
Inhibit tag Number Yes Tagnumber to inhibitthis channel
Reference guide
229AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Alarm and inhibit deleays
There are separate parameters for alarm delay on and off, as wellas delay of inhibit on and off. When the conditions for alarm orinhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must bestable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the newalarm condition is accepted and an event is issued. Delays arespecified in seconds.
Inhibit parameters
Tag Number
Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tagnumber’s external parameter must be set to activate the ProcessData Object (PDO) transmission on changes.
6.4 Engineers safetyThe engineers safety (dead man) system is a system for engineerfitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by theengineer within predefined time period, if not, the system willindicate ”Engineer fitness alarm”.
6.4.1 Functions
• Start, stop and reset from pushbuttons.
• Control from the Remote Operator Station.
• Warning light activated by relay.
• Alarm horn activated by relay.
• Range check of timers according to IMO rules.
When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expiredtime delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the systemis not reset within a new time period, the system will activate analarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typicallybe activated from the Remote Operator Station by selected alarmswhen running an unattended engine room.
6.4.2 Local control
The system is activated and de-activated manually by akey-switch. The system can also be activated automatically fromthe alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs duringunattended engine room. A number of reset push buttons arelocated around the ship.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
230 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6.4.3 Remote Operator Station controlWhen an alarm occur in bridge watch, the engineer safety handleris activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timersare not reset by the command from Remote Operator Station, ifalready running.
6.4.4 ParametersParametername
Type Adj. Function Initialvalue
Par.ref.
Tag1: Start Number Yes Start/on digital inputTag reference
Tag1
Tag2: Stop Number Yes Stop/off digital inputTag reference
Tag2
Tag3: Re-set
Number Yes Reset digital input Tagreference
Tag3
Tag4: OnWatch
Number Yes Remote Operator Sta-tion Tag for telling theDead man system thatsomeone is set onWatch
Tag4
Tag5: NewAlarm
Number Yes Remote Operator Sta-tion Tag for telling theDead man system thata new alarm is acti-vated.
Tag5
T1: Warn-ing time
Number Yes Time from reset or startuntil warning is acti-vated
20 Min P1
T2: Alarmtime
Number Yes Time from warning isactivated until alarm
150Sec
P2
S1: IMOCompliant
Yes/no Yes Enable check timersaccording to IMO rulesfor machinery deadman system
Yes B1
Tag 4 and 5 areused when the dead man handler is part of theWatchCalling System at the Remote Operator Station. Then the tagpointed to by tag4 is active when the Watch Calling System is setto bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tagpointed to by tag5 will be activated, and this will activate the deadman handler in the same way as if tag1 was activated. Decimalpoint is 0.
Maintenance
231AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 IntroductionThis chapter explains how to keep the system in good workingorder and what to do if the system fails.
The following subjects are covered:
- Overview
- Unit replacement
- Preventive maintenance
- Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations
- Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System
- Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
232 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.2 OverviewThis maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenancetechnicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digitalcircuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level ofinformation is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systemsmaintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall,with the help of the documentation and the system’s built-in testfunctions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, andreplace major parts, modules and components on a “LineReplaceable Unit” (LRU) level. He/she will however not attemptto repair the LRUs.
Note Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaningsolutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.
7.3 Unit replacement
WARNING Turn power off before replacing any parts!
Note DataChief C20 units are not field repairable. Any attempt willvoid the warranty.
Package faulty units using the box from the replacement unit andsend it to Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems for repair.
→ Refer to page 271 for information on how to get in touch with us.
7.3.1 Recommended toolsDrawings of the installation.
Digital multimeter.
Sensor simulator.
Screwdriver for wire terminals: Flat 3 x 0.7 mm.
Screwdriver for screen termination board: Flat 7 x 1.0 mm.
Screwdriver Pozidriv: POZI #1.
Cable ties.
Maintenance
233AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.4 Preventive maintenance
7.4.1 GeneralKongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends thefollowingpreventive maintenance routine for the DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagement:
• Weekly: Clean all operator panels, and run the on-line lamp andunit function tests. Clean all filters for units equipped with fans.
• 6-Monthly: Check cables and cable entrances, electricalscrew-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections.
• Yearly: Check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors andoutput actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan(or Site’s Maintenance Plan) should be referred to for obtaining arecommended preventive maintenance schedule for test ofmeasuring-points and the alarm-system.
Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends that the operationof each unit and its functions is checked after any majormaintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing,testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressuresensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance,we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to theinstruction given in this manual.
7.4.2 Weekly maintenanceThis maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lampand/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will notinterrupt normal system operation. Do the following:
Remote Operator StationsEach week do the following for each Remote Operator Station:
1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit usinga clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - nottoo wet.
2 Push LAMP TEST.
- All alarm group and the SYSTEM FAILURE indicatorsshould be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.3 If the Remote Operator Station is fitted with an external air
filter, clean it.
- Additional preventive maintenance procedures, if any to becarried out as described in the manufacturers manual foreach unit.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
234 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Midi Operator Station
Each week do the following for each Midi Operator Station:
1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and displayscreen. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. Forheavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has beendipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water.Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaningsolutions containing spirit or alcohol.
Local Operator Stations
Each week do the following for each Local Operator Station:
1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solutionof warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.
2 Push TEST and then ENTER.
- All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on.
3 Push SOUND OFF.
- Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to turn indicatorsand buzzer on and off.
4 Push MENU UP to exit the test.
5 Push SELECT DOWN and ENTER.
6 Push each button and verify that the button function isprinted on the display.
7 Push TEST to exit.
- If the test fails, refer to trouble shooting section.
Watch Calling System
Each week do the following for each Watch Bridge and WatchCabin Unit:
1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solutionof warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.
2 Push LAMP TEST.
3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. Thedisplay (if any) should display configuration data.
- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.
- If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent,replace the unit.
Distributed Processing Units
The distributed processing units do not require weeklymaintenance.
Maintenance
235AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.4.3 6-monthly maintenanceWhere applicable; check the following parts of the system each6-month period:
1 Check cables and cable entrances for dammage to the cable.
2 Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.
3 Tighten all plug connections.
7.4.4 Yearly maintenanceEach year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors andoutput actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Ingeneral, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signalis correct. Compare the input signal to this system, with the inputsignals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibratedin two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or bycalibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built intothe DataChief C20. The calibration software is accessible fromthe “Tag Details” menu on the Remote Operator Station, or fromthe Local Operating Station when available.
Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s MaintenancePlan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommendedpreventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points andthe alarm-system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthlyto 6-monthly schedule.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
236 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations
7.5.1 How to use the Service consoleprogram
Introduction
Caution The Service console program should only be used by trainedpersonnel. Improper use may seriously degrade the performanceof the DataChief C20 system.
The main functions of Service console are:
• Start Remote Operator Station(s).
• Stop Remote Operator Station(s).
• Copy databases containing the systems configuration data fromRemote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote OperatorStation(s).
• Copy project specific software from Remote Operator Station1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s).
• Copy any selected files.
• Back-up selected project data.
• Restore project data from back-up files.
• Install updates to the system software (service packs) to theRemote Operator Stations.
• Check the status of installed software in selected RemoteOperator Stations against Remote Operator Station 1
Note When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copiedto must be stopped.
Maintenance
237AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Explanation to the System Information Display
To start the Service console program go to the System informationdisplay dialog.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
238 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Explanation to the main dialog
The following two illustrations briefly explains the main functionsof the main dialog. Consult the operating procedures for step bystep procedures on how to use it.
Maintenance
239AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
240 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Explanation to the Backup dialog
Dialog to specify the type of files and destination for the back-up.
How to start Service console
At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Push the System Information Display button.
2 Select Service console.
3 Type in the password and push enter.
- The main Service console window is displayed.
How to stop Remote Operator Stations
When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copiedto must be stopped. At Remote Operator Station 1 do thefollowing:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Stations.
2 Push the Stop Station button.
- The selected Remote Operator Stations are stopped.
How to start Remote Operator Stations
After copying files into Remote Operator Station(s), restart it. Atthe Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball button to select RemoteOperator Stations.
2 Push the Start Station button.
- The selected Remote Operator Stations are started.
Maintenance
241AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to copy the database
The following describes how to copy the database from RemoteOperator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). AtRemote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Station(s).
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Copy Database button.
- The database is copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).
4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy project software
The following describes how to copy the project specific softwarefrom Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote OperatorStation(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Station(s).
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Copy Project SW button.
- The project specific software is copied into the selectedRemote Operator Station(s).
4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations
The following describes how to copy files from Remote OperatorStation 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At RemoteOperator Station 1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Station(s).
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Copy Files button.
- The Select Files to Copy dialog is displayed.
4 Select the required files and push Open.
- The files are copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).
5 Push the Start Stations button.
How to update differences
The following describes how to update file differences betweenRemote Operator Station 1 and the selected Remote OperatorStation(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
242 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Station(s).
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Update Diffs button.
- All files with differences from those in Remote OperatorStation 1 are copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).
4 Push the Start Stations button.
How to back-up project data
The following describes how to back-up project data from RemoteOperator Station 1 either to a specified path on the hard disk or tofloppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:
1 Push the Backup button.
- The Backup dialog is displayed.
2 Do one of the following:
* Select a group from the pull-down Filter menu or
* Select the relevant file types under Include.
3 If you want the back-up on floppy disk, insert a disk and pushto disks(A).
4 If you want the back-up to a different path than c:\Ros pushAdvanced and type in the path.
5 Push the Make Backup button.
- The back-up is created as specified.
How to restore project data
The following describes how to restore project data to RemoteOperator Station 1 either from a specified path on the hard disk orfrom floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do thefollowing:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all RemoteOperator Stations.
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Restore button.
- The Restore dialog is displayed.
4 If the back-up is on floppy disk insert it and select the filesto restore.
5 Push the Restore button.
- The files are restored as specified.
Maintenance
243AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
How to install service a service pack
The following describes how to install a service pack on yourDataChief C20. The service pack is installed on all RemoteOperator Stations simultaneously. At the Remote Operator Station1 do the following:
1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all RemoteOperator Station.
2 Push the Stop Stations button.
3 Push the Install button.
4 Select the file(s) to install.
- The service pack is unzipped and distributed to all RemoteOperator Stations.
5 Push the Start Stations button.
7.5.2 How to set up a Remote OperatorStation from an image file
1 Turn power to the Remote Operator Station off.
2 Put the CD with the Remote Operator Station image file CDinto the CD-ROM reader and the boot floppy disk into thefloppy-drive.
3 Turn power on.
- The image program will then guide you through the processof restoring the software.
Note If the hard disc has defects, it is not possible to restore the RemoteOperator Station from an image file.
How to set up the Local Area Network
Use 3 COM cards for all Local Area Network connections.
1 Install both cards before turning power on.
- This ensures that all Remote Operator Stations get the sameIRQ address for the same network card.
- This means that network cards for network A and B has thesame position on all Remote Operator Stations.
2 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.
3 Push the Windows button, point to Settings and clickControl panel.
4 Click on Network.
5 Select Protocol tab.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
244 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
6 Confirm that Network Protocol is: TCP/IP Protocol
7 Click OK and OK again.
8 Close the Control panel window.
How to set the Remote Operator Station name
To set up a Remote Operator Station in a Network it needs a name.To set up computer name do the following:
1 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.
2 Push the Windows button, point to Settings and clickControl panel.
3 Click on Network.
4 Select Folder identification tab.
5 Type in the Remote Operator Station name.
- Remote Operator Stations use the following names: ROS1,ROS2, ROS3 etc.
6 In Workgroup, type in ROS.
7 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.
8 Close the Control panel window.
How to set the IP address
To set up the Remote Operator Station for dual Local AreaNetwork, a specified IP address must be inserted for each LANcard. Do the following to set the IP address:
1 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.
2 Push the Windows button, point to Settings and clickControl panel.
3 Click on Network.
4 Select the Protocols tab.
5 Under Adapter select the Local Area Network card youwant to configure. One of these:
- [1] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)
- [2] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)
6 Tick off Specify an IP address.
7 Type in an IP address according to the table below.
8 Type in a Subnet Mask.
Maintenance
245AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
IP--Address LAN A IP--Address LAN B
ROS1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100
ROS2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101
ROS3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
9 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.
10 Close the Control panel window.
7.5.3 How to shut down a RemoteOperator Station
To avoid malfunctions, follow this procedure:
1 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.
2 Push the Windows button, point to and click Stop DCC20.
3 Push the Windows button, point to and click Shut Down.
4 Click OK.
5 Power will automatically shut off.
7.5.4 How to replace colour graphicsdisplays
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displaysusing both CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and flat panels can be usedwith the DataChief C20. The display must how ever be able tohandle a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Also consider thatthe new display must fit into the space available. Do the following:
1 Make sure the colour graphics display is turned off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.
3 Remove the colour graphics display.
4 Place the new colour graphics display in the place of the oldone.
5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.
6 Turn the colour graphics display on.
- Confirm that it is working correctly.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
246 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.5.5 How to replace printersWe recommend that the replacement printer is of the same makeand model as the old one. However a number of different printerscan be used with the DataChief C20. If you change the type ofprinter used, a new printer driver must be installed in the PCdriving the printer. To do this follow the instructions provided withthe printer. Keep in mind that the new printer must fit into the spaceavailable. Do the following:
1 Make sure the printer is turned off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.
3 Remove the printer.
4 Place the new printer in the place of the old one.
5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.
6 Turn the printer on.
7 Print any log.
- Confirm that the printer is working correctly.
7.5.6 How to replace Operator ControlPanels
All Operator Control Panels are identical except for the labelsinside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacementpanels with the labels for your configuration already installed. Inyour order specify the ship name or yard and hull number.
It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and installthem in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommendit. Do the following:
1 Remove the mounting screws.
2 Lift the panel up.
3 Disconnect the power cable and then the three data cables.
4 Place the new panel in the place of the old one.
5 Connect the three data cables and then the power cable.
6 Put the panel back in it’s place.
7 Mount the screws securely.
8 Test that the Operator Control Panel is working correctly.
7.5.7 How to replace Remote OperatorStation PCs
Replacement PCs must be ordered from us specifying the shipname or yard and hull number, and which of the Remote Operatorstation the PC belongs to (ROS1, ROS2, etc.). We will then set upthe PC with your system configuration and the correct hardwareinterfaces.
Maintenance
247AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
It is possible to configure a PC onboard. This how ever requires aservice or commissioning engineer. Any attempt to do this willvoid the warranty.
Replacement
1 Shut the PC down and turn power off.
2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cables notingdown exactly where each cable goes.
3 Remove all printed circuit boards in the card slots notingdown exactly where each card goes.
4 Place the new PC in the place of the old one.
5 Install the printed circuit cards in the same locations as in theold PC.
6 Connect the data cables and then the power cable.
7 Turn the PC on.
7.5.8 How to install the RemoteOperator Station software
Use the following procedure when you have replaced the hard diskor when you have re-installed Windows NT.
Note Do not attempt this procedure unless you are very familiar with theWindows operating system.
Before you start any action, verify that you have a disk imageCD-ROM marked DC60052.0x (x is the number of the softwareversion installed in your system) and a service pack located on aset of floppy disks or a CD-ROM marked DC60052.
Install the disk image
The disk image is a CD-ROM containing the software that wasinstalled in your system at commissioning time. Do thefollowing:
1 Connect a standard PC keyboard to the Operator ControlPanel.
2 Insert the disk image CD-ROM, marked DC60052.0x.
3 On the monitor click Start, point to Shut Down, and selectRestart.
- The PC will restart booting from the CD-ROM. The programEasyRestore will automatically start.
4 Answer Yes/OK to questions, and then let the program run.
- After about ten minutes you will be asked to restart the PC.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
248 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 Answer Yes/OK.
Set the LAN address and computer name
Remote Operator Stations use the following computer namesand Local Area Network addresses:
Computer name LAN IP addressAdapter 1/LAN A
LAN IP addressAdapter 2/LAN B
ROS 1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100
ROS 2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101
ROS 3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102
ROS 4 172.17.0.103 172.16.0.103
...
Do the following:
6 On the monitor click My Computer, and then click ControlPanel.
7 Double-click on Network, and then click the Protocols tab.
8 Click Properties, select each network adapter and set the IPaddress according to the table above.
9 When finished, click OK.
10 Click the Identification tab, and then Change.
11 Modify the computer name to ROSn (where n is the numberof this Remote Operator Station), click OK.
12 Click OK again.
13 When asked to reboot, answer Yes.
- The Remote Operator Station will reboot.
14 If you experience problems with the desktop shortcuts forStart-up DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad seeWhat to do if you have problems with desktop shortcutsbelow.
Install the latest service pack
The service pack is located on a set of floppy disks or on aCD-ROM marked DC60052. It consists of a number ofself-extracting zip files. As an example, service packDC60052.07.003 consists of the following files:
* DC60052_07_003_disk#1.exe
* DC60052_07_003_disk#2.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #1.exe
Maintenance
249AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
* DPU 3.02 disk #2.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #3.exe
* DPU 3.02 disk #4.exe
How to install the latest service pack is described under “How touse the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Copy ship specific files and databases
How to copy ship specific files and databases is described under“How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.
Testing the Remote Operator station
Do the following to verify that the Remote Operator Station is nowworking correctly:
15 Double-clicking the Startup DCC20 icon.
16 Verify that all items specified in the case ROSn section ofthe startup script starts without error messages.
17 Verify that the CAN Interface Server (CIS) starts and loadsthe new configuration data into all Distributed ProcessingUnits it is responsible for.
What to do if you have problems with desktopshortcuts
When changing the computer name of a PC running Windows NT,you may experience problems with shortcuts on the desktop, suchas Startup DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad. Typically,when you double-click on an icon, nothing happens. To solve theproblem do the following for each problem icon:
18 Right-click on the shortcut, select Properties.
19 Select the Shortcut tab.
20 In the Target field, replace \\ROS1\c withC:\ROS\config\Bin\....
21 In the Start in field, replace \\ROS1\c withC:\ROS\config\Bin\....
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
250 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.6 How to install the Midi Operator StationWARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and
contains no user serviceable parts. Opening theunit will void the warranty. If the glass in thescreen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself onthe sharp edges of the glass pieces.
7.6.1 Placement
Figure 135 Midi Operator Station mounting.
Determine the most suitable and convenient place for operationafter considering the following conditions:
* There is limited exposure to direct sunlight to avoidoverheating.
→ Refer to the requirements on page 44 for suitable ambianttemperatures
* There is good ventilation and minimum vibration.
* The minimum distance to a magnetic compass is 500mm(20”).
* Sufficient space behind the unit is available to allowproper cable connections to the rear panel connectors.
Maintenance
251AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.6.2 CutoutFor flushmount installations use the following cutout.
13595 ø2.5
4pcs
132
243
240
230
Figure 136 MOS 33 cutout drawing.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
252 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.6.3 Electrical connections
Power supply connection
* The internal voltage regulator will allow the MidiOperator Station (MOS 33) to operate normally withinthe power supply voltage range from 10 to 32 V DC. A24 volt power supply is however recommended. The MidiOperator Station is connected to external power throughthe terminal list. The cable length between the terminallist and the Midi Operator Station is approximately 2meters. After connecting the cable to the power source,push the plug as far as it will go into the nine pinreceptacle marked PWR on the rear of the cabinet andturn the plug’s coupling ring clockwise until it makes aclick.
MOS33
Terminal list
Figure 137 MOS 33 connection drawing.
Fuse
Note A 4.0 Amp slow fuse should always be installed to protect the unit.
CAN bus interface connection
* The CAN bus connection is also made through theterminal list. Make sure to connect using the correctpolarity. Also make sure the end (CAN) terminatorsupplied with the unit stays in place.
Maintenance
253AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.7 Troubleshooting Midi Operator StationsWARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and
contains no user serviceable parts. Opening theunit will void the warranty. If the glass in thescreen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself onthe sharp edges of the glass pieces.
7.7.1 Troubleshooting checklist
Symptom Check RemedyNo picture on displayscreen.
Check that thesupply voltage isbetween 10 – 32VDC.
Faultfind supplyvoltage.
Check fuse in powercable fuse holder.
Replace fuse. Useslow type 4.0A slow.
Picture appears onthe display screen,but image is too darkor too bright.
Adjust light/ contrast.
No normal picture orkey operation.
Disconnect powerand connect poweragain.Replace unit.
7.7.2 How to replace Midi OperatorStations
Note Never replace more than one Midi Operator Station at a time!
Do the following:
1 If the unit is flush mounted remove the corners.
2 Remove mounting screws.
3 Lift the panel out.
4 Disconnect the cables.
5 Replace the unit.
6 Connect the cables.
7 Replace mounting screws securely.
8 Replace corners if these where removed.
Note Configuration can only be done at the master Remote OperatorStation.
9 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.
10 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules andpush Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
254 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
11 Type in the password: *****
Note For error detection and replacement purposes the Midi OperatorStation is treated as a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit).
12 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed MidiOperator Station and push Install Replacement DPU.
-
- After a few moments the system indicates SuccessfullyReplaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unitdisappears.
13 Confirm that the Midi Operator Panel is working correctlythtrough operational use.
Maintenance
255AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations
7.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagramTo troubleshooting the Local Operator Station use the followingflow diagrams to determine the problem:
Is theSYSTEM FAILindicator lit?
Replace the fuse orreset the circuit
braker.
Start LOStroubleshooting
Yes
Disconnect and thenreconnect power.
Does theLOS
operate?
Checkthe LOS again. Still
failed?Contact us for assistance.
Replace the unit.
The wiring haswrong polarity.
Correct the wiring.
END
No
Green
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check24volt power input. Is
power OK?No
Check theterminal board
inside the mountingframe. Check LED
indicator?
Red
Yes
Doesthe LOS operate?
Yes
No
Dark
Figure 138 Local Operator Station troubleshooting flowdiagram.
WARNING Health hazard
If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must beturned “ON” to check LED indicator, etc. Take care not to touchexposed terminal boards and components!
Caution Against equipment damage
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
256 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panelfront downwards onto a soft cloth.
7.8.2 How to replace Local OperatorStations
All Local Control Stations are identical, no configuration isrequired. Do the following:
1 Remove the mounting screws.
2 Lift the panel up.
3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.
4 Slide the top panel out.
5 Disconnect the cable.
6 Connect the cable for the new unit.
7 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.
8 Mount the side cover and screws securely.
9 Test that the Local Operator Panel is working correctly.
7.8.3 How to recommision a LocalOperator Station
- No manual recommissioning is necessary after replacing aLocal Operator Station.
- The Local Operator Station will check the network andestablish contact with the available Distributed ProcessingUnits automatically.
Maintenance
257AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System
7.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagramsThe troubleshooting of the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unitsare identical. Use the following flow diagrams to determine theproblem:
Is theROS working
correctly?Troubleshoot the ROS.
Start Watch CallingSystem troubleshooting
Yes
Check the mimic displayWatch Calling
configuration 1 of 2.
Do you havecommunication with all
WBU/WCU units?
Does theWBU/WCU panels
operate?
Checkthe WCS again. Still
failed?
Contact us for assistance.
Troubleshoot the WBU/WCU unit using the next
troubleshooting flowdiagram.
Check the ROS interfaceboard to the CAN bus. If
OK, troubleshoot theCAN network cables .
END
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Figure 139 Watch Calling System troubleshooting flowdiagram.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
258 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Is theSYSTEM FAILindicator lit?
Replace the fuse orreset the circuit
braker.
Start WBU/WCUtroubleshooting
Yes
Check the mimicdisplay Watch Callingconfiguration 1 of 2.
Does theWBU/WCU
operate?
Checkthe WCS again. Still
failed?Contact us for assistance.
Replace the unit.
The wiring haswrong polarity.
Correct the wiring.
END
No
Green
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check24volt power input. Is
power OK?No
Check theterminal board
inside the mountingframe. Check LED
indicator?
Red
Yes
Doesthe WBU/WCU
operate?
Yes
No
Dark
Figure 140 Watch Bridge or Watch Cabin Unit troubleshootingflow diagram.
WARNING Health hazard
If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must beturned “ON” to check LED indicators, etc. Take care not to touchexposed terminal boards and components!
Caution Against equipment damage
To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panelfront downwards onto a soft cloth.
Maintenance
259AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.9.2 How to replace Watch Callingunits
There are two types of Watch Bridge Units and two types of WatchCabin Units. For each type all panels are identical exept for thelabels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to orderreplacement panels with the labels for your configuration alreadyinstalled. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hullnumber.
It ispossible to remove the labels fromthedefectiveunit and installthem in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommendit.
Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels inhis/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is Onduty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode.
Replacement
1 Remove the mounting screws.
2 Lift the panel up.
3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.
4 Slide the top panel out.
5 Disconnect the cable.
6 Note down the LMT address for both the old and the newunit.
- Each watch calling panel has a unique ID, called an LMTaddress. This address is either found on a label placed on theside of the panel and looks like this:
Figure 141 Label with LMT address
- The LMT address is placed at the bottom of the label, in thiscase NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If this label is missing, there should be a smaller label placedon the bottom of the panel or inside the panel looking likethis:
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
260 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 142 Label with last part of LMT address
- The number written at the bottom of the label is last part ofthe LMT address, in this case 8453, indicating that the LMTaddress is NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.
- If you have a watch calling panel with an LCD display, youcan also find the LMT address by pushing LAMP TEST(power must be connected). The LMT address is displayedin line 3 on the LCD display.
7 Connect the cable for the new unit.
8 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.
9 Mount the side cover and screws securely.
Configuration
WARNING The following should only be done by trainedpersonnel.
Note Configuration can only be done from the master Remote OperatorStation.
10 Find the wcall.ini file using the the Windows Explorer.
- It isnormally located in theC:\\Ros\Config\Database folder.
11 Double-click the file to open it using the Notepad.
12 Look for a section named Panels that looks something likethis:
[Panels]
Panel1=1,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000005382
Panel2=2,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006165
Panel3=3,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000006162
Figure 143 Figure 1.3 The panels section of the wcall.ini file.
13 Locate the LMT address for the panel you replaced.
14 Replace this LMT address with the LMT address of the newpanel.
15 Save the wcall.ini file.
Maintenance
261AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
16 Copy the file to the other Remote Operator Stations asfollows:
→ Refer to page 240 for How to start the Service console.
→ Refer to page 241 for How to copy files into Remote OperatorStations.
17 Each DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station must bestopped and started again for the changes to take effect.
→ Refer to page 240 for How to stop the Remote Operator Stations.
→ Refer to page 240 for How to start Remote Operator Stations.
18 Test that the Watch Calling unit is working correctly
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
262 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.10 Troubleshooting Distributed ProcessingUnits
7.10.1 How to handle DistributedProcessing Units error codes
All Distributed Processing Units have Built In Self-Test. Thesereport errors to the Remote Operator Stations on the systemchannel.
- The following table gives an overview of the error codes andappropriate actions:
Errorcode
Error description Action
49 RAM fail Replace the module.
48 Transmitter overcurrent (RAi16and C1 modules)
Check all channels forhigh current load.
47 Fuse fail (RDi32 and C1 mod-ules)
Check all inputs.
46 Printed circuit board temperaturehigh
Check the ambient tem-perature.
45 Parameter flash memory failure Reset the module andtry again. If failing again,replace the module.
CAN 1 -- plug X8:
40 CAN controller busoff
39 CAN controller error status set
38 CAN controller overrun
37 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections
36 HP Tx queue overrun
35 LP Tx queue overrun
34 Transmit fault
CAN 2 -- plug X9:
30 CAN controller busoff
29 CAN controller error status set
28 CAN controller overrun
27 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections
26 HP Tx queue overrun
25 LP Tx queue overrun
24 Transmit fault
Maintenance
263AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
7.10.2 How to handle DistributedProcessing Units communicationerrors
When the Remote Operator Station gives a communication errorfor one of the Distributed Processing Units. Do the following:
1 Locate the Distributed Processing Unit.
2 Check LED power and status indicators.
Figure 144 LED power indicator. Green indicates that power isavailable and red that the power has wrong polarity.
Figure 145 LED status indicators.
3 Read the status for each indicator above and check it againstthe table below.
LED indicators
Fault type:Run Watch
dogInfo. End Init. Power
Normaloperation
Green Dark Flashingyellow
Green Green
No applica-tion loaded
Dark Red Dark Green Green
Not initialised Dark Red Dark Dark Green
Applicationstopped
Dark Red Dark Green Green
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
264 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Power haswrong polarity
Dark Dark Dark Dark Red
No power Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
4 Follow the action for the fault you found as described below.
Normal operation
Indicators lit: Run (Green), Info. (flashing yellow), End Init.(green) and Power (green).
- The unit seems to be working OK.
1 Check the cabling.
2 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.
3 It the Remote Operator Station is still reporting an errorreplace the module. See procedure below.
No application loaded
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red), End Init. (green) and Power(green).
1 Return the item to us.
Not initialised
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and Power (green)
1 Reload the application from a Remote Operator Station.
2 If the the same indicators are still lit, replace the module. Seeprocedure below.
Application stopped
Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and End Init (green)
1 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.
2 If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the module. Seeprocedure below.
Power connected with wrong polarity
Indicators lit: Power (red)
1 Correct the power polarity and check again.
2 If the Power indicator is still red, replace the module. Seeprocedure below.
No power
Indicators lit: None
Maintenance
265AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Check power supply and wiring.
2 If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the module.See procedure below.
7.10.3 How to start or stop RemoteOperator Stations
Caution Only to be used by trained personnel. The functionality foundhere will allow you to stop the complete Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management!
1 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.
2 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Start DC modulesandpush Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.
3 Type in the password.
- The following window is displayed.
4 From the list, select the Remote Operator Station you wantto start or stop.
5 Under Start/Stop Stations push the appropriate button.
- Run State will indicate the status of the selected unit.
Figure 146 Window for starting or stopping of RemoteOperator Stations.
7.10.4 How to configure a new DPUchannel
Use the following procedure to add an alarm channel to theDataChief C20.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
266 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
1 Find a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit) with a sparechannel of the correct type.
In the engine-room
2 Wire the sensor to the spare channel.
At the remote operator station
3 Push the System Info Display button.
4 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Unit Display (if notalready selected) and push Enter.
- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lowerleft side of the colour graphics display.
5 Type in the number of the selected DPU and push Enter.
- The information about the selected DPU is displayed
6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select the spare channel.
7 Push the Tag details button.
8 Select the Advanced tag details tab using the trackball.
9 Select tag description.
10 Enter the commissioning password: *****
11 Push Enter.
12 Change the tag description to give it a relevant name for thenew alarm.
For analogue channels
13 Under the Advanced Tag Details tab change for example:
* Engineering unit type
* Engineering unit high
* Engineering unit low
14 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:
* Logs, delays and alarm limits as relevant.
Maintenance
267AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 147 Advanced tag details for an analog channel.
Figure 148 Tag details for an analog channel.
For digital channels
15 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:
* Logs and delays
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
268 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Figure 149 Advanced tag details for an digital channel.
Figure 150 Tag details for an digital channel.
Disable commissioning access16 When finished push the System Info Display button.
17 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Commissioning andpush Enter.
- The prompt Enter 0 to disable commissioning access: isdisplayed on the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.
Maintenance
269AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
18 Type in 0 and push Enter.
- Commissioning status changes from Yes to No.
7.10.5 How to replace DistributedProcessing Units
Note Never replace more than one DPU unit at a time!
All DPUs look very similar. Make sure the replacement unit is ofexactly the same type as the failing unit. Type specification isavailable on the label for each unit. Do the following:
1 Remove the screws for the termination bracket.
2 Disconnect all connectors.
3 Remove the mounting screws.
Figure 151 Electrical disconnection.
Figure 152 Mechanical disconnection.
4 Install the replacement unit.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
270 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
5 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.
6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules andpush Enter.
- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.
7 Type in the password: *****
8 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed unit andpush Install Replacement DPU.
- After a few moments the system indicates SuccessfullyReplaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unitdisappears.
9 Confirm that the DPU is working correctly.
Replaceable parts
271AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
8 REPLACEABLE PARTS
8.1 IntroductionThis chapter contains a list of spare parts available for theDataChief C20 including part numbers. Not all parts are listedher, only those defined as Line Replaceable Units (LRU) to bechanged by on-board maintenance personnel. Information onconfiguration settings is also included.
8.2 How to get in touch with usShould you need to get in touch with us for any reason use thefollowing addressing information:
Kongsberg Maritime Ship SystemsBekkajordet 8 AP.O. Box 1009N-3194 Horten, NORWAY
Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00Telephone 24 hours service: +47 91 52 80 82Fax: +47 85 02 80 82E-mail for service: [email protected] for spare parts: [email protected]
8.3 Consumable spare PartsAir filter for Remote Operator Station 2603925
PC fan for Remote Operator Station 3900282
Box printer paper 2500 sheet A4-size 1200002
8.4 ModulesMOS33 - Midi Operator Station 4403239
WBU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100114
WBU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100131
WCU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100138
WCU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100141
RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module 8100148
RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler 8100161
RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module 8100154
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
272 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module 8100172
RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module 8100153
RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module 8100155
RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module 8100181
RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module 8100182
RIo-C3-GP - Generator Protection 8100251
RIo-C3-GDCP - Generator & Diff. Current Protection 8100225
RIo-C4 - Generator Protection module 8100226
VCC 440 - Voltage Converter Controller module 8100242
dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller 8100183
PSS - Process Segment StarCoupler 8100184
LOS - Local Operator Station 8100158
UPS SMPS 700 V 220vac/24vdc 28A 3800248
UPS 220vac / 24vdc 10 A for cabinet montage 3800334
UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 780VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800351
UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 1080VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800352
8.5 Plugs and accessories4 Pole connector 3401038
5 Pole connector 3401191
6 Pole connector 3401039
8 Pole connector 3401192
9 Pole connector 3401289
11 Pole connector 3401193
12Pole connector 3401290
Cross connection link for power and CAN 3100295
Termination resistor 120 ohm 5100091
8.6 Other spare parts
Colour graphics display
A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displayscan be used with the DataChief C20. The minimum requirementsto these are:
Replaceable parts
273AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
• Screen resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels
To order a replacement unit specify the following information:
• Colour graphics display size (17”, 19”, 21” or bigger both CRTand flat screen types are available).
Remote Operator Station computer
The personal computer unit forming part of the Remote OperatorStation is loaded with DataChief C20 system software andconfiguration software unique for each vessel. To order areplacement unit specify the following information:
• Vessel name.
• Ship yard name.
• Hull number.
• Where located on the ship
8.7 Configuration settingsThere are no hardware configuration settings such as dip switchesfor any of the modules.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
274 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
8.8 DrawingsThis chapter contains drawings refered to in other parts of themanual:
- Local Operator Station
- Midi Operator Station
- Watch Bridge Unit
- Watch Cabin Unit
- RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module
- RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler
- RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module
- RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module
- RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module
- RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module
- RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module
- RIo-C3 - Generator protection module
- dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller
Replaceable parts
275AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 6W maximumUnit weight: 1.4kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Rotate end covers 180 deg. to change between flush andwall mounting. Use countersunk head screws.
Local Operator Station,Watch Bridge Unit &Watch Cabin Unit
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
276 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: through plugSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 10 W maximumUnit weight: 1.0kgTemperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
MOS33 Midi Operator Station
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: Through plugSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.5 kgTemperature range: -10 Deg. C to +50 Deg. C
Replaceable parts
277AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 11W maximumUnit weight: 2.0kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RAi--16 Remote Analogue input module
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
278 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.8 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RAi--10tc Remote Analogue input module
Replaceable parts
279AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.8kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RDi--32 & 32a Remote Digital input module
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
280 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.5kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RAo--8 Remote Analogue output module
Replaceable parts
281AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 2.0kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RDo--16 Remote Digital output module
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
282 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 12W maximumUnit weight: 2.0 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RIO--C1 Remote Input Output module
Replaceable parts
283AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.8 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RIO--C2 Remote Input Output module
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
284 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 15 W maximumUnit weight: 2.0 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RIO--C3 Generator protection
Replaceable parts
285AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 15 W maximumUnit weight: 2.0 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
RIO--C4 Generator monitoring and control
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
286 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.8kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
VCC Voltage Converter Controller
Replaceable parts
287AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 15W maximumUnit weight: 1.6 kgTemperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C
Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.
Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.
dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
288 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
9 APPENDIX
9.1 IntroductionThis appendix contains definitions, abbreviations and referencesused in this document.
The following subjects are covered:
- Abbreviations
- References
Appendix
289AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
9.2 Abbreviations
9.2.1 GeneralAC Alternating CurrentBIST Built In System TestCAN Control Area NetworkCE Communite EuropeenCD Compact DiscCCR Cargo Control RoomdPSC Dual Process Segment ControllerDC DataChiefDPU Distributed Processing UnitECR Engine Control RoomEMC Electro Magnetic CompatibilityEMD European union Maritime DirectorateGUI Graphic User InterfaceIACS International Assocciation of Class SocietiesIMO International Maritime OrganisationI/O Input/OutputIFH Instrument Failure High alarmIFL Instrument Failure Low alarmIP Ingress ProtectionKMSS Kongsberg Maritime Ship SystemsLAN Local area NetworkLAS Local Alarm SystemLCD Liquid Crystal DisplayLED Light Emitting DiodeLOS Local Operator StationLRU Line Replaceable UnitMCU Main Computer UnitNC Normal ClosedNO Normal OpenOCP Operator Control PanelPC Personal ComputerPCB Printed Circuit BoardPDO Process Data ObjectPDS Process Data SegmentPLC Programmable Logic ControllerPMS Power Management SystemPSS Process Segment StarcouplerRAi Remote Analogue Input unitRAi tc Remote Analogue Input unit for termo couplers
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
290 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
RAO Remote Analogue Output unitRDI Remote Digital Input unitRDO Remote Digital Output unitROS Remote Operator StationSGW System GatewayUMS Unmanned Machinery SpaceUPS Uninterruptible Power SupplyUTC Coordinated Universal TimeWBU Watch Bridge UnitWCU Watch Cabin Unit
9.2.2 Alarm list abbreviationsThe following is a list of abbreviations used in alarm list inRemote- and Local Operator Stations.
Analogue sensors
OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is notchecked for alarm situations and is not measured anymore.
Grad Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.
Low Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a setlimit.
Lo-Lo Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower thana set limit.
High High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a setlimit.
Hi-Hi High-High alarm. When the input signal is lower thana set limit.
IFL Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example whena 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.
IFH Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example whena 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.
Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoidunnecessary alarms such as when the main engine isstopped.
Digital sensors
OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is notchecked for alarm situations.
Open The switch is open, such as ”valve open”
Closed The switch is closed, such as ”valve closed”
Appendix
291AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Short The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit
Broken The wiring to the sensor has a open-circuit
Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoidunnecessary alarms such as when the main engine isstopped.
DataChief C20 / Instruction manual
292 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
9.3 ReferencesDataChief C20Alarm and monitoring systemInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0376Item number: 0400150
DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process controlInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0378Item number: 0400152
DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with power managementInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0379Item number: 0400153
DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagementInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0377Item number: 0400151
Instruction manual
293AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003
Blank page
Dat
aChi
ef
C20
/Ins
truc
tion
man
ual
294
AD
-037
7/R
evC
13.0
2.20
03
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
DataC
hiefC20
Instructionmanual
Alarm
andmonitoringsystem
with
processcontroland
powermanagem
ent
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
DataC
hiefC20
Instructionmanual
Alarm
andmonitoringsystem
with
processcontroland
powermanagem
ent
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
DataC
hiefC20
Instructionmanual
Alarm
andmonitoringsystem
with
processcontroland
powermanagem
ent
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
Blank page
Document printing instructions
This page and all pages hereafter are not part ofthe manual and should not be printed!
1 The whole document including the front page is asingle PDF-file with the document number AD-0377.
2 Print the front page in colour.
3 The rest of the document should be printed in black& white, 2-sided printing.
4 References is the last section that is part of thedocument, after that there is various usefulinformation not normally printed.
5 The sheet before this one contains labels for thespine of binders.
6 The following page(s) containing “TAGS” is used forinternal document updating purposes only.
Tags - DO NOT PRINT!
Kilde: Library I7 -Ansvar: Kjell GrøntoftDokument historie:01.02.2002 releasedBrukt:AD-0377 DataChief C20reg.no bokVersion: IngenAndre attributter i bruk: IngenDataChief C20 AMSDenne siden innehloder alle tags som er brukt i manualen.1 Functional description2 Getting started3 Operating information4 Reference guide5 Maintenance6 Replaceable parts7 Appendix
Filnavn Nivå Tag Kommentar
Functional description
Intro 1 c20_funcdes_01 Introduction
3 c20_funcdes_02 MOS tech spec.
Getting started
Intro 1 c20_getstrt_01 Introduction
ROS 3 c20_getstrt_02 Understanding the Re-mote Operator Stationdisplay.
c20_getstrt_03 Access levels MOS
Alarm and monitoring system
Intro 1 c20_operate_01 Introduction
ROS 3 c20_operate_02 How to access theWatch Calling configur-ation.
3 c20_operate_03 How to enable resettingof counters
3 c20_operate_04 How to display systeminformation
3 c20_operate_05 How to change timezone
3 c20_operate_06 How to change tagparameters for an ana-logue channel
3 c20_operate_07 How to change tagparameters for a digitalchannel
3 c20_operate_08 How to set the intervallfor selected points log
3 c20_operate_09 How to change tagparameters
Process control system
1 c20_pcs_01 Introduction
Power management system
1 c20_pms_01 Introduction
Reference Guide
Intro 1 c20_refguid_01 Introduction
3 c20_refguid_02 Exhaust mean value tagitems
Maintenance
Intro 1 c20_maint_01 Introduction
4 c20_maint_02 How to start Serviceconsole
4 c20_maint_03 How to copy files intoRemote Operator Sta-tions.
4 c20_maint_04 How to stop RemoteOperator Stations
4 c20_maint_05 How to start RemoteOperator Stations
Replaceable parts
Intro 1 c20_parts_01 Introduction
Appendix
Intro 1 c20_append_01 Introduction